英语七年级教案
时间：2023-11-14 英语七年级教案 七年级教案英语七年级教案模板。
以下介绍一篇网络上非常出色的“英语七年级教案”文章。制作高质量的教学教案课件是老师成功授课的重要前提，所以在撰写时务必不要匆匆了事。设计富有创意的教学课件能够提升学生的学习兴趣。非常荣幸邀请您来阅览本页内容！
英语七年级教案 篇1
年级 Grade 2
教学用具 电脑、录音机、卡片
教学用时 一课时
设计模式 教师：创设情景――激发兴趣――组织活动――指定目标
学生：交流探究――合作活动――锻炼能力――升华习惯
教 材 分 析 学生已学完了全部字母，一些简单的单词和日常用语，为学生提供“字母-单词”的复习游戏素材，巩固已学到的知识从而引出新课. It’s raining是新标准英语第一模块第二单元的内容，本单元是围绕天气状况为题材展开的。在日常生活中，“天气”与我们密切相关，如何问答天气便是本单元所要学习的交际用语，是教学大纲要求掌握的重要语言功能项目之一。
学生分析
本节课授课的对象是小学二年级的学生，初学英语的孩子对语言运用意识不强，设计一些简单的句子进行提问，激发学生对英语学习的兴趣。同时学生的认知水平比较好，能读出所学词语，具有较强的可塑性。
设计理念
英语课程的教育理念中指出“要面向全体学生、关注学生的情感，营造宽松民主和谐的教学氛围，倡导任务型的教学途径。本节课就是根据这些理念进行设计的，以培养兴趣为前提，让学生把所学的知识运用到实践当中，让学生通过感知、体验、实践以及合作探究来实现学习目标。
教学目标
(一)知识目标： 1. 以游戏的方式检验学生对26个字母的掌握情况，要求能听懂及正确识别。
2. 词汇: hot, cold, raining, snowing, windy,
sunny以及如何问答天气的交际用语
3. 争做小小天气预报员。
4. 学唱英文歌曲
(二)能力目标：本节课通过课堂活动，完成了听、说、读、写、唱的技能训练，使学生通过感知、实践、合作
完成任务，感受成功，提高语言实践运用能力。
(三)德育目标：通过这节课让学生懂得要爱护我们周围的环境，爱护树木，从自我做起，保护地球美丽的家园。
(四)情感目标：在学习中，我注意使用鼓励性的语言，帮助学生克服紧张的心理，提高自信心。
教学重点 词汇: hot, cold, raining, snowing, windy, sunny以及如何问答天气的交际用语
教学难点 对What’s the weather like?的答语，It’s raining. It’s snowing也可说成It’s rainy. It’s snowy.
教学流程
一.谈话引入
1. 铺垫，知识回忆
想一想，到现在你学会了哪些英语知识?说说看，比一比谁学到的多?
2. 激趣，字母游戏：创设情境，发现问题
大家学会的可真不少!今天，我们就应用所学会的一些字母做一个游戏，你们喜欢吗?
老师给每个同学发一张卡片，上面有一些字母，下面同学们仔细听，把老师读到的字母划掉，看看你发现了什么?每个小组第一桌的同学到前边来做，看哪组分高。
师读：C、D、I、J、K、M、N、Q、S、U、V、X、Y
Now, tell me please. What do you find?
生：单词flag, go, zoo, bag, pen.
师：OK! You are very clever.
完成的同学得一朵小红花。
师：这里有一个单词同学们没有找到，那就是我们今天学习的weather.
( 游戏能为小学生的英语学习带来快乐，使枯燥、机械的句型操练变得生动，活泼，因此，在教学过程中，应恰当的把游戏引入课堂，寓教于乐。)
二.利用多媒体学习新单词
1. 练习生词的读音
课前让学生查找与天气有关的单词，学生通过搜索资料提高搜索信息的能力，培养学生探究能力，然后进行六个单词的重点学习,在听完磁带后，找学生读单词，纠正他们的发音。
( 利用电教多媒体能使课堂更加生动，直观，图文并茂，使学生能够在轻松愉快的气氛中学习。)
2. 交际英语
运用What’ the weather like? 就图片上的天气进行提问。
( 英语要作为交际工具来教，也要作为交际工具来学，做到学用统一。)
3. 图片与句子相连接，学生走到微机前进行连接。
三.争做小小天气预报员
就各地区的天气进行预报。
( 兴趣是的老师，而兴趣来自好奇，来自体验，提供实践机会，让他们参与表演，这既符合儿童好动、表现欲强的年龄特点，同时也会进一步加强对所学知识的掌握。)
四.学唱歌曲
1. 运用肢体语言教学生词snoring, bumps his head,确信学生理解歌曲的意思。
( 肢体语言，可使学生在语言和动作、表情间建立直接的联系，从而获得形象的感知，能收到良好的效果。)
2. 建立超连接，运用新标准动画光盘教唱歌曲，在演唱中配以相应的动作，然后小组间展开竞赛，看哪个小组唱得，为唱得的学生发小红花，并鼓励他们把新学的歌曲唱给爸爸妈妈听。)
( 小学生性格天真活泼，特别喜欢唱歌，在演唱中配以相应的动作会更引起他们的参与和投入，在英语歌曲中学新词，既减轻了学生的心理负担，又能在轻松愉快的气氛中学到新知识。)
五.总结升华
以沙尘暴为例对学生进行爱护周围环境的思想教育，让我们的天空更蓝。
六.课堂小结
在活动中复习巩固了所学知识，掌握了如何问答天气，以及在愉快的气氛中学会了一首英文歌曲，增强了学英语的自信。
七.课后作业
1. 观察本周天气情况，进行预报。
2. 如果你想了解天气的更多知识，请同学们登陆 ,老师相信你一定会成为一名出色的天气预报员。
八.课后反思
本节课在教学模式中采用任务型教学法，在授课过程中应用了游戏法，分组合作法、启发诱导法，演唱教学法。教学设计按照 老师：创设情景――激发兴趣――组织活动――指定目标 学生：交流探究――合作活动――锻炼能力――升华习惯，使全体同学在充分的活动中学到了新的知识，取得了较好的教学效果。
九. 板书设计
It is raining.
Word list:
Hot、cold、raining、snowing、windy、sunny
Sentences：
What is the weather like?
It is raining. (snowing、rainy、snowy)
英语七年级教案 篇2
一.学习目标:
(1)知识与技能:
1. 掌握下列重点单词： spell, please,
2. 掌握下列重点句子：
——What's this in English?
—— It’s a key.
—— Spell it, please.
—— K-E-Y.
3.会大、小写字母 Aa---Rr .
4.掌握元音字母I和O的发音
(2)过程与方法: 通过听、读、说等活动培养良好的听和口头表达的能力;通过独学、对学、小组合作，学会正确读写本课新学表示物体的单词及目标句型。
(3)情感态度价值观:培养与人合作的精神。
二、学习重点、难点
1.会大、小写字母 Aa---Rr .
2.熟记单词 spell， please .
3.掌握元音字母I，O的发音
三.学法指导：预习中自主学习的方法，课堂上积极参与小组讨论、合作、探究的方法。
四.学具准备：录音机、磁带、课本，教案
五.学习过程：
回顾反馈 预习提纲
1.按顺序默写出所学大、小写字母 。
2.写出上节课学的问句，并给出一适当答案 。
明确目标 学案教
学生自读目标 完成预习部分
自主学习 合作探究
1.猜句意Spell it, please.
2.学生听并跟读，同时老师板书Spell it,please. K-E-Y.
3.学习单词 spell, please .
4.练习：用所学物品两人一组，练习1a对话 .
5.表演1a(用老师所示物品问答).
展示提炼 拓展延伸
1.听1b，小组检查、核对 .
2.比一比：看图2a每组参加1人，按物品的某种顺序，看谁写得又快又准。
3.听录音做3a -3b .
4.总结前4个元音字母的主要发音，把字母按发音相同因素分
类老师适当提示。
教学反思
实践证明，拼图法，数字游戏，单词接龙游戏，小歌诀，顺口溜等传统教学方法并不过时，教师再辅以现代化的教学手段，借助图片，幻灯片，动漫等手段，真正达到重情景，重趣味，重运用，使单词具有语言的意义，使其在特定的语境中被引出，这样既便于学生理解，印象也深刻，从而达到学以致用的效果。
英语七年级教案 篇3
Words: cap shoe shirt glove
Whose cap is it?
Is mine .Thanks.
Tall, tall, I am tall. Short, short, I am short.
Nice, nice, I am nice. Heavy, heavy, I am heavy.
Fat, fat, I am fat.(这里只要求学生跟着教师做动作，热闹一下即可)
1）（导入就用本班同学，本课的重点语言结构是形容词性物主代词与名词性物主代词的用法，可通过真实情景导入。）同学们老师今天在咱们班发现一个问题，惊讶一些，引导学生的好奇心。（然后老师把现象呈现给大家，教师事先把同学们比较熟悉的本班同学的日常用品放在桌子上，让学生猜测这些物品都是谁的，老师在此时可以引出句型）Whose jacket is it? Whose caps are these? Whose pencil is it?（把这三句话写在黑板上，让学生根据讲台前的物品猜出并说出汉语意继而给出公式特殊疑问代词+名词+be动词+其他成分
2）然后看一下三个句子，并说一下Whose是特殊疑问代词，引起特殊疑问句因此从语法角度出发，后面的be动词要根据前面的名词而变化，同时宾语也要随主语的变化而变化这一语法重点。
3）教师提醒学生注意，英语中物主代词的用法不同，分为形容词性物主代词与名词性物主代词。二者的区别主要是看物主代词之后的名词，如果物主代词之后依然出现名词，则表示需要用到形容词性物主代词；如果物主代词之后不再出现名词，则需要运用名词性物主代词。教师在此可举例讲解让学生理解什么是形容词性物主代词和名词性物主代词，然后教师在黑板上写出my shoes=mine your cap=yours his pencil=his heir dress=hers our map=ours their books=theirs 学生根据之前的知识积累不难找出规律。然后教师在黑板上写出物主代词相互转换的题目，让学生通过之前找出的规律在黑板上进行练习（可进行笔头练习）
4）根据学生的程度，可扩展特殊的，Where、What Who What color How
等特殊疑问代词引导的问句，并练习相应的回答。
1) Words：tall short nice heavy fat
快速抢答，做动作，在此时教师把chant 教给学生。
Is that your cap?
Are these your caps?
Are those your caps?
计时赛：以组为单位，快速朗读三遍，看那组的时间用的短。
4）用实物操练两个基本句型：教师准备一些实物，出示其中的几个，挑选一组同学示范，通过问答的方式练习句型，猜测这些物品是哪个同学的东西，猜到的同学需要回答是否是自己的东西，即复习特殊疑问句又练习乐物主代词的用法，猜对的同学可获得相应的加分。为学生的学习创设一个情景。
找朋友的游戏。以组为单位，分成两组，教师可提前做一些物主代词的卡片，打乱顺序，让两个小组进行比赛，看那组最先把物主代词区分出来。
1）总结一下什么是物主代词的区别。
2）怎样使用Whose开头的特殊疑问句以及回答。
英语七年级教案 篇4
一.指导思想
认真抓好中小学英语知识的衔接是搞好初一英语教学工作的重要一步。在本学期的英语教学中，坚持以下面的教学理念为指导。
第一，切实地了解学生的真实水平，注意衔接，尽快使学生适应英语教学;
第二，教学要面向全体学生，关注学生的情感，激发他们学习英语的兴趣;
第三，以学生为主体，尊重个体差异，因材施教;
第四，在新课标的指导下，倡导学生体验参与学习，完成设计目标;
第五，注重过程性评价，建立能鼓励学生自主学习能力发展提高的综合评价体系。
二.学生情况分析
本届学生在英语基础方面很薄弱，由于在以前学习英语的过程中，没有很详细全面地学习音标，基本的音标和字母拼读都没有掌握好。在词汇，语法规则等方面存在很多缺漏。所以，在听、说、读、写这四项技能上，学生水平存在很大差异。
另外，学生在学习策略和情感态度方面也存在诸多需要进一步解决的问题。例如：许多学生不能明确学习英语的目的，学习缺乏主动性、自觉性;大多数同学没有养成良好的学习习惯，不能做好课前预习和课后复习工作，学习没有计划性和策略性，也不注意知识的积累和巩固。
最后，在课堂上，习惯像以往被动地接受所传授的知识，不善于发现和总结语言规律，学习的主体性不突出。
三.教材分析
教材特点与重难点：以话题为引导呈现整个单元的内容，词汇量非常大，单元间的梯度较大，是否能适应并完成词汇的学习是学习的重点。
四.教学目标
1.总体目标：激发学生学习英语的兴趣，树立自信心。
2.具体目标：使大多数学生能够掌握英语拼读，学生掌握拼读规则后，学习英语词汇自然会变得轻松愉快，记忆单词的效率随着学习的深入将会有质的飞跃。此外，在整个教学过程中，放慢进度，循序而进，对学习困难较大的学生要增加别辅导时间，强化辅导，使他们逐步适应初一牛津英语学习的需要。
五.教学措施
1.认真贯彻晨读制度：规定晨读内容，加强监督，保证晨读效果。
2.认真分析吃透新教材，结合学生的具体情况，对教材适当进行整合。作为担任初一英语的任课教师，一定要了解学生哪些知识在小学已经学过，哪些属于新知识，明确小学英语和初一英语相同、相异处，制定好教学计划，从词汇、语法和语言功能上找准衔接点，以便在教学中做到详略难易，有所侧重。
3.认真分析学生现状，从学生的实际出发组织教学，教材起点高，作为使用教材组织教学的教师在分析现有生源较差的前提下，教学起点要低。在学习7A版之前，学生虽以预备级作为衔接教材，但教师在教的过程中不能只考虑进度，要重视教学质量。词汇知识要在巩固好小学基本词汇的基础上不断扩大词汇量，语法知识的衔接则要通过反复呈现、归纳、逐步提高难度。
4.改进教学方法、方式，不断创新英语教学工作牛津初中英语教材的编排，体现英语教学改革的新理念。它是对传统英语教学的挑战，也是给新课程的改革带来了机遇，作为教师要与时俱进，不断创新，才能适应新教材的教学工作。
英语七年级教案 篇5
【学习目标】：1、复习掌握本单元的单词及短语。
2、熟练运用本单元句型。
3.学会书写应聘广告。
【学习重点】： 学会书写应聘广告。
【学习过程】：
一、自主学习(教师寄语：Knowledge is power.)
学习任务一: 熟悉掌握本单元单词和短语。
1、自读并记忆单词5分钟。
2、组内练习，相互提问。
3、展示交流，小组竞赛(以听写形式进行展示)。
跳舞____________________游泳_______________唱歌_______________
画画___________________说话________________吉他_______________
国际象棋______________ 鼓__________________钢琴________________
喇叭__________________ 小提琴______________音乐家_______________
那时，然后_____________摇滚乐_____________ 乐队_______________
演出,表演_______________星期日_____________下午________________
中国功夫_______________可能________________少量_______________
电子邮件__________ 通讯处________________为什么_______________
4、相互检查。
学习任务二: 阅读3a部分内容补全卡上信息。
1. 自读3a部分对话完成右边卡片。
2. 跟读对话,纠正发音。
3. 小组讨论,理解对话并找出重难点。
4. 教师点拨。
5. 复述对话。
学习任务三：参考3a部分信息写一个人物将她介绍给艺术俱乐部.
Cindy . 女, 12岁, 能画画, 会弹钢琴, 会跳舞, 英语好.她想加入艺术俱乐部. 请打电话: 0535-4563321和她联系.
二、合作共建
小组讨论may 和can 的用法.
may 和can 都是 ________动词. 意思是___________,后面加________
如:can 是一种能力。
他能说英语和汉语He _________ speak__________and _______________.
may 是允许， 可以。
我能知道你的名字吗? ___________ I __________your name ?
他不会弹吉他。_____________________________________.
我可以加入音乐俱乐部吗? ______________________________________?
三、系统总结 Self Check
1.运用本单元所学的语言基础知识，完成第一题。
2.小组讨论，完成第二题。
3.根据自己的实际情况，完成第三题。
4.小结训练。
The teacher asks the students to make a survey,and fill in the blanks.
Name Can Play well or not Can’t Club Why
I
四、当堂检测
(一)句型转换:
1. I want to join the art club.(划线提问)_________ ________ do you want to join?
2.My e-mail address is rickleihao@.(就划线部分提问)
__________ __________ e-mail address?
3.She can play the violin.(变成一般疑问句) ________ she _________ the violen?
4. We wan to join the English club. (否定句)
We ______ _______ tp join the English club.
5. They can’t sing. They can’t dance. (合并成一句)
They __________ sing ______ dance.
英语七年级教案 篇6
初一英语外研版(上)教案 Module 8 Choosing presents
一、学习目标: 1.单词和短语：
card, party, present, would, always, great, cake, never, special, eat, give, sing, happy, secret, CD, cinema, concert, magazine, scarf, silk, shirt, T-shirt, choose, e_ercise, wear, e_pensive, clothes, shoes, spend, money, film, song, match, weekend, at weekends, dear, hear, hear from, afraid
2.交际用语：
1)—Would you like to come to my birthday party? —Yes, I’d like to.When is it? 2)Great! 3)It’s a secret.3.重点句子：
1) Daming always gets birthday presents! 2) She often goes to the cinema.3) What do you usually do at a Chinese birthday party? 4) We sometimes give birthday cards.5) My mother never makes a birthday cake.
二、重点及难点:
1.频度副词的使用及在句中的位置。 2.动词第三人称单数形式。
三、教学设计: Unit 2 She often goes to concerts.ⅠTeaching model Reading and writing.
ⅡTeaching method Communicative approach ⅢTeaching aims
1.To get information from the reading material about choosing birthday presents.2.To write a description of one’s partner.3.To get to know compound nouns.ⅣTeaching Objectives
Key vocabulary: CD, cinema, concert, magazine, scarf, silk, shirt, T-shirt, choose, e_ercise, wear, e_pensive, clothes, shoes, spend, money, film, song, match, weekend, at weekends ⅤTeaching aids Recorder, OHP, video ⅥTeaching Steps Step 1 Warming-up 1.Review the te_t of Unit 1.
some pictures, ask the students to look at the pictures, then talk something about the pictures. 3.Introduce the new words.4.Read the new words.Step 2 Practice 1.Look at the pictures in Activity 1.
2.Read through the list of presents and have the students repeat them after you chorally and individually.3.Match the words with the pictures.
4.Check with a partner.
5.Call back the answers from the whole cla.Keys:
1.a concert ticket
2.a magazine
3.a silk shirt 4.a bo_ of chocolate
5.a T-shirt 6.a CD 7.a scarf 8.a cinema ticket
9.a football Step 3 Reading.1.Play the recording.2.Ask the students to read through the paage.3.Match the people with what they like doing.4.Check with a partner.5.Call back the answers from the whole cla.Keys: 1.c 2.b 3.d 4.a 5.e
6.Choose presents from the pictures in Activities 1 for them.7.Check with a partner.8.Call back the answers from the whole cla.Keys:
1.T-shirt 2.a silk dre, a scarf, and a bo_ of chocolate
3.a magazine and a cinema ticket 4.a CD, a concert ticket 5.football plete the paage with the correct form of the words from the bo_.10.Check with a partner.11.Call back the answers from the whole cla.Keys: 1.spends
2.money
3.silk
4.e_pensive ncert 6.weekends
7.matches
8.choose Step 4 Writing and speaking.
A.Write these sentences with ’ (apostrophe).1.Read through the sentences.2.Write these sentences with ’ (apostrophe).3.Check with a partner.4.Call back the answers from the whole cla.B.Make a list of things you like and do.1.Ask the students to make their lists individually.2.You may care to suggest they write five things they like and five things they do.
in pairs.1.Ask the students to talk about things they like and do . 2.Write a description of their partner.Step 5 Important and difficult points.She has got 11 silk scarves, 20 shirts and a lot of shoes.在英语中，有些名词表示由两部分构成的东西。这些名词常常只用复数形式。做主语时谓语动词要用复数，表示数量时常与“数词+ pair(s) + of”搭配。 如：
shoes鞋
trousers 裤子
glaes 眼镜
gloves手套
shorts短裤
sciors剪刀
chopsticks筷子
That pair of trousers is Tony’s. 那条裤子是托尼的。 Sciors are used to cut things. 剪刀是用来剪东西的。 Step 6 Do e_ercises: A、单词拼写：
1.I have two ______(双)of new shoes.2.The clothes are very nice.I don’t know which one to ______(选择).3.I have two______(票).One is for my mother, the other is for my sister.4.How much is this ____________(杂志)? 5.How much do you _________(花费) on these presents? 6.Please give me a _______(音乐会) ticket.7.He’ll buy two _____(盒子) of cookies for his son.8.This is a _______(丝绸) shirt.9.I don’t know those ________(歌手).10.My aunt sells ___________(衬衫).Answers: 1.pairs 2.choose 3.tickets 4.magazine 5.spend
ncert 7.bo_es 8.silk 9.singers 10 .shirts
B、翻译下列句子：
1.他喜欢阅读,但不喜欢去看电影。
__________________________________________________ 2.她从末去看足球赛。
__________________________________________________ 3.他既不喜欢打蓝球,也不喜欢踢足球。
__________________________________________________ 4.我妹妹经常去听音乐会,并且常买些她喜欢的歌手的唱片。 __________________________________________________ Answers: 1.He likes reading, but he doesn’t like to go to the cinema.2.She never goes to the football match.3.He doesn’t like playing basketball or playing football.
4.My sister often goes to concerts and she usually buys CDs by her favourite singers.
英语七年级教案 篇7
Unit 2 Looking Different
Topic 1 I have a small nose.
Section A
The main activities are 1a, 2a and 3a. 本课重点活动是1a, 2a和3a。
Ⅰ.Teaching aims and demands 教学目标
1.Learn some new words:
(1)Learn words about parts of the body:
nose, eye, head, face, hair, ear, mouth, neck
(2)Learn some other new words:
guess, have, small, has, big, know, right, round, long, wide, girl, boy, short
2. Learn some useful sentences:
(1)Oh, I know.
(2)Yes, you’re right.
3. Learn the simple present tense with“have/has”and adjectives of description:
(1)I have a big nose.
(2)They have round faces.
(3)She has long hair.
(4)It has big ears.
4. Learn how to describe people’s appearances.
Ⅱ. Teaching aids 教具
小黑板/影片的封面或图片/教学挂图/录音机
Ⅲ. Five-finger Teaching Plan 五指教学方案
Step 1 Review 第一步 复习(时间:10分钟)
通过复习，培养学生根据图画和文字信息进行简单交流的能力。
(出示小黑板上的图画和文字信息，师生进行互动问答，然后让学生两人一组表演对话。复习描述人的基本情况。)
Name: Jane
Age: 12
From: Canada
School: Beijing Ren’ai International School
Class: Four
Grade: Seven
Phone number: (010)9267-6929
(1)T: What’s her name?
S1: Her name is Jane.
T: How old is she?
S2: She is twelve.
T: Where is she from?
S3: She is from Canada.
T: What class is she in?
S4: She is in Class Four, Grade Seven.
T: What’s her telephone number?
S5: It’s (010)9267-6929.
(把全班学生分成两组就此对话进行表演。)
(2)(根据图画导入新内容。)
T: Well done! Now we have learned something about Jane. Do you like her? Is she beautiful? Then how to describe her appearance? First, let’s learn some new words about parts of the body. Now let’s look at the picture.
Step 2 Presentation 第二步 呈现(时间:12分钟)
利用图片，借助体态语，帮助学生学习语言，并培养他们的观察能力。
1. (教师利用Jane的图片教授2a中人体部位的名称，并在图片的相应位置板书单词，然后领学生拼读。注：教师应按照从上到下、从局部到整体的顺序讲授人体部位，以便帮助学生记忆。)
T: Please listen and follow me, then touch the parts of your body when you say them. Please go!
(板书生词，要求学生掌握，并让学生注意拼读。)
head face hair eye ear nose mouth neck
2. (利用2a的教学挂图，操练表示人体部位的名词。)
T: Let’s look at this picture. What’s this?(手指画着头部的图片。) S1, please.
S1:Head.
T: How do you spell it, please?
S1:H-E-A-D, head.
(以同样方式操练其他表示人体部位的名词。)
3. (以做游戏的方式呈现新单词和短语，使学生易于理解和接受。具体方法如下：把全班学生分成四组，每组轮流选出一名学生在黑板上画人物头像。每个学生画一个身体部位。例如，第一个学生画的是一张圆脸，教师就帮助学生说a round face。板书并解释。其他身体部位以同样方式呈现。直到把所有本节课所涉及的描述性形容词都呈现出来为止。可以多画几幅图，完成后，每组学生轮流用短语描述人物外貌特征，说得准确流利者为胜。)
T: Nice work, boys and girls. Now let’s play a game. I’ll divide you into four groups. Each group chooses a student to draw a part of the body. And you should describe it with a phrase. OK. Let’s begin!
(板书boy和girl，并要求学生掌握。)
boy, girl
S2: (画一个圆脸) A round face. (教师帮助学生说。)
(板书并解释，要求学生掌握。)
round
S3: (画一双小眼睛) Small eyes.(教师帮助学生说。)
(板书并解释，要求学生掌握。)
small
S4: (画一个大鼻子) A big nose.(教师帮助学生说。)
(板书并解释，要求学生掌握。)
big
…
(以同样方式呈现a wide mouth, big ears, long hair，要求学生掌握。)
4. (出示3a的教学挂图，让学生观察图片中突出的外貌特征，巩固表示人体部位的名词和部分形容词。)
T: OK, now look at these pictures. Let’s talk about their different looks. Is this nose big?(教师指着图片1的鼻子，并借助手势问。)
Ss: Yes. It’s big.(引导学生说。)
T: Good. He has a big nose. Are they big, too?(教师指着图片②问。)
Ss: No.
T: Very good. They are not big. They are small. They have small noses and small eyes.(教师指着图片2的鼻子和眼睛说。)
(以同样方式操练其他四幅图片。)
5. (在熟练掌握人体部位和描述人体部位形容词的基础上，结合3a的教学图片，让学生操练形容词+人体部位的短语，然后教授have和has的用法，进而过渡到完整的句子。)
(教师说出一个人称代词，让学生结合3a的教学挂图说出用have还是用has。)
T: Next, please practice the sentence patterns. I say personal pronouns, you complete the sentences.
T: Look at Picture 1. “I …”
Ss: I have.
T: The whole sentence.(“完整的句子”)
Ss: I have a big nose.
T: Picture 2. “We …”
Ss: We have ...
(教师示意说完整的句子。)
Ss: We have small eyes.
T: Picture 3.“They …”
Ss: They have …(教师帮助说)
(教师示意说完整的句子。)
Ss: They have round faces.
…
6. (播放3a录音，让学生跟读并注意语音语调。)
T: Listen to 3a and repeat. Pay attention to the pronunciation and intonation.
7. (1) (总结have/has的用法并板书。)
T: Let’s sum up the usages of“have”and“has”.
① have: S(I/We/You/They) +have …
② has: S(He/ She/ It)+has …
(2) (教师带领学生运用身边的实物，练习用have/has造句。)
T: I have a book.
She has a big pencil-box.
He has a beautiful bag.
…
Step 3 Consolidation 第三步 巩固(时间:8分钟)
完成3b和4。通过小组竞赛，接龙游戏，替换练习等活动，进一步操练have，has的用法。
1. (小组竞赛。限定时间要求学生书面完成3b。核对答案，并让学生复述have/has的用法，最后让学生齐读这七个句子。)
T: Now, let’s P.K. Can you complete the sentences in 3b on Page 26 as quickly as you can? Then I’ll divide you into two teams. Boys must choose the sentences which they use “have”. Girls must choose the sentences which they use “has”. Please go.
2. (接龙游戏。教师根据自己的实际情况以第一人称说一个句子，学生模仿练习。)
T: Well done. Now let’s play a game in chains. You can say a sentence to describe yourself. Please use “I have” to make sentences, for example, I have a big nose. Begin!
S1: I have a small nose.
S2: I have a long face.
S3: I have a big head.
S4: …
…
3. (根据学生的描述，有意识板书一些句型，运用肢体语言，引导学生进行替换练习。)
T: Nice work. Huang Lin and Huang Hao, please.
Huang Lin: I have a small nose.
Huang Hao: I have a small nose.
T: You can say together like this: We have …
Huang Lin and Huang Hao: We have small noses.
T: And the whole class can say like this: They have …
Ss: They have small noses.
Huang Lin: I have a small nose.
Huang Hao: I have a small nose.
(引导他们用we来描述，注意单复数形式，其他同学用they转述。教师板书。)
Huang Lin and Huang Hao: We have small noses.
Ss: They have small noses.
(引导其他同学来描述，教师板书。)
Lin Ying(女): I have long hair.
Ss: She has long hair.
Chen Bin(男): I have big ears.
Ss: He has big ears.
4. (请学生根据描述，完成4。)
T: Read the passages and draw pictures.
5. (两人一组，一位描述，另一位画，画完后同桌交流。评选出优胜小组并将其画贴在墙上，以资鼓励。)
T: Let’s draw a picture in pairs. One reads, the other draws. Are you ready?
Ss: Yes.
T: Let’s begin.
S5: This girl has a round face, big eyes …
S6: (根据S5的描述，画女孩的面部特征。)
…
Step 4 Practice 第四步 练习(时间:8分钟)
完成1a，1b，2a和2b，进一步帮助学生巩固本课的功能项目，培养学生的听说能力。
1. (用学生画得较好的图片进行问答，问答过程中教师板书新内容，并进行简单解释。)
T: Nice work. Do you know the boy? He has a round face, big eyes, a small nose, a wide mouth and small ears. His hair is short. He is a boy in Group Three. Can you guess?
Ss: Cheng Long.
T: Yes, you’re right.
(板书，并要求学生掌握。)
guess
know
I know.
right
You’re right.
2. (播放1a录音，请学生跟读并注意语音语调，然后判断下列问题的正(T)误(F)。)
T: Listen to 1a and repeat. Pay attention to the pronunciation and intonation. Then mark the following sentences True (T) or False (F).
(1)Michael has a big nose. ( )
(2)Kangkang has a small nose. ( )
3. (让学生戴上面具两人一组表演，完成1b。)
T: Now practice the dialog and then I’ll ask two students to act it out.
4. (看2a部分，用适当的形容词描述人体部位的特征。)
5. (学生两人一组进行表演，完成2b。)
T: Listen to your partner and touch the parts of your body he/she says.
S1: Touch your nose.
S2: (按S1指令做出相应动作。)
…
Step 5 Project 第五步 综合探究活动(时间:7分钟)
通过综合探究活动，使学生能够在真实的语境中锻炼口头表达的能力。同时启发学生的思维，培养他们的观察力。
1. (教师分别请一男生、一女生到黑板前，请下面的学生描述他们的外貌，教师先示范，然后以滚雪球的方式继续活动。)
(1) T: This boy has a round face.
S1: He has a round face and small eyes.
S2: He has a round face, small eyes and a big nose.
S3: …
(2) T: This girl has long hair.
S4: She has long hair and a big nose.
S5: She has long hair, a big nose and a small mouth.
S6: …
2. (听音辨人。从所听语段中获取相关信息，并作出判断。)
T: Let’s play a guessing game. Listen carefully. He is a boy in Group Five. He has big eyes and big ears. He has a wide mouth and a big head. He has a small nose and long hair. Who is he?
S7: Lin Wen.
T: No.
S8: Lin Fen.
T: Yes, you’re right.
(掌声鼓励。)
(分组进行听音辨人游戏。)
T: Now I’ll divide our class into four groups. Do as I do, please.
…
3. Homework:
(1)复习Section A。
(2)预习Section B生词。
(3)描述一位朋友的外貌。
板书设计：
I have a small nose.
Section A
1. I know.
2. You’re right.
3. (1)I have a big nose.
(2)We have small eyes.
(3)They have round faces. I/We/You/They + have …
(4)She has long hair. He/She/It + has …
(5)He has a wide mouth.
(6)It has big ears.
Section B
The main activities are 1a, 3 and 4. 本课重点活动是1a、3和4。
Ⅰ. Teaching aims and demands 教学目标
1. Learn some new words:
favorite, movie, star, Chinese, again, look, arm, hand, leg, foot
2. Learn some useful sentences:
(1)—Who is your favorite movie star?
—It’s Bruce Lee.
(2)Guess again.
3. Continue to learn the description of people’s appearances:
(1)Her eyes are small.
(2)She has a small face, big eyes and a small nose.
4. Continue to learn the simple present tense with have/has:
(1)—Does he have long hair?
—No, he doesn’t.
(2)—Does he have a wide mouth?
—Yes, he does.
Ⅱ. Teaching aids 教具
教学挂图/录音机/学生照片/小黑板
Ⅲ. Five-finger Teaching Plan 五指教学方案
Step 1 Review 第一步 复习(时间:9分钟)
通过复习上节课的目标语言，引出并学习本节课新句型。训练学生的口头表达能力。
1. (检查上节课布置的课外作业。教师把学生分成十二个小组，让学生在小组内描述他的一个朋友，然后请两个学生向全班同学描述。教师要及时给予表扬。)
T: Hello, boys and girls. From last period, we learnt how to describe someone’s appearance. Now I’ll divide our class into twelve groups. Then you talk about your friend’s looks in groups. You can begin like this: I have a friend. He is a boy. He has … And then I will choose two of you to report it in the front.
2. (教师出示28页5a的教学挂图，请八名学生依次到黑板前，按教师指令，触摸玩具的身体部位，并要求学生在黑板上写出相对应的单词。)
T: Very good! Next, look at the doll. I’ll ask eight students to come to the blackboard one by one. Please touch and write down the names of the parts of the body on the blackboard. Do you understand?
Ss: Yes.
T: Touch her hair.
Touch her face.
…
(复习学过的身体部位的名词后，教师指着图片教授并板书新单词arm, hand, leg, foot, 同时强调foot的复数形式是feet。在学生会读并理解词义后，教师继续发出指令，让所有学生做相应的动作。)
T: Great! Let’s go on learning other parts of the body. When I read, please touch the parts of your body. Please go!
T: Touch your arm.
Touch your hand.
Touch your leg.
Touch your foot.
(教师板书并要求学生掌握。)
arm, hand, leg, foot, feet
3. (教师利用5a的教学挂图继续问答，导入本课新句型。)
T: Look at the doll. Does she have long hair? (教师引导学生回答。)
Ss: Yes, she does.
T: Does she have small eyes? (教师引导学生回答。)
Ss: No, she doesn’t.
(板书并要求学生理解。)
does Does she have …
Yes, she does.
doesn’t No, she doesn’t.
(教师示范后，请学生用上面的句型就其他身体部位进行问答练习。)
T: Well, now practice the drills above one by one. One asks, the other answers. Please go!
S1: Does she have big ears?
S2: No, she doesn’t.
S3: Does she have a small mouth?
S4: Yes, she does.
…
Step 2 Presentation 第二步 呈现(时间:10分钟)
通过1a对话，使学生初步掌握动词have/has的一般疑问句及其肯定和否定回答，并学习新句型Who’s your favorite …?。
1. (教师在黑板上画一颗星星。)
T: This is a star.
(在星星下方板书star，引导学生推测出词义，并要求学生掌握。)
star
(继续板书movie star。)
movie star
T: 《赤壁》is a nice movie.《功夫熊猫》is a movie, too. Can you guess what’s the meaning of“movie”?
Ss: 电影。
T: Nice work. What’s the meaning of “movie star”?
Ss: 电影明星。
T: Good! Who is your favorite movie star?
(板书并要求学生掌握。)
favorite
(采访两三位学生，说出他们最喜爱的电影明星是谁，导入1a。)
2. (出示1a教学挂图。)
T: You all have your own favorite movie stars. Who is Michael’s? Do you want to know about him? (指着图片。)
T: This is Michael’s favorite movie star. Can you guess who he is? S1, please.
S1: Li Lianjie.
T: No. Li Lianjie is my favorite movie star. Guess again. S2, please.
S2: Bruce Lee.
T: No. He is from China. He is Chinese and has a big nose. OK. Now listen to 1a and guess again. Who’s Michael’s favorite movie star?
(板书Chinese和again，要求学生掌握。)
Chinese, again
3. (学生听录音猜测图片上的人物，教师鼓励他们谈论自己最喜爱的电影明星，可让同桌两人一组进行操练。)
T: Who’s he? S3, please.
S3: He’s Cheng Long.
T: Yes. You’re right. Now practice the dialog in pairs like this:
S4: Who is your favorite movie star?
S5: My favorite movie star is Li Lianjie./It’s Li Lianjie. He is tall and strong …
…
4. (再播放1a录音，请学生跟读并注意语音语调。)
T: Listen again and repeat. Pay attention to your pronunciation and intonation.
Step 3 Consolidation 第三步 巩固(时间:10分钟)
通过听说读写的练习，强化动词have/has的用法及描述人的外貌特征的方法。
1. (让学生完成1b，巩固1a。)
T: OK, just now, you talked about your favorite movie star. Can you talk something about your favorite teacher with your partner? You can use the sentences: “Who is your favorite teacher?” “Guess, he’s …” “Does he have …?” “No. Guess again.”
2. (教师拿出准备好的学生照片说：“假定这位学生是你的朋友，请根据1a，表演对话。)
T: Suppose this is your good friend, Lin Wen. Make a similar conversation according to 1a, and act it out.
S1: I have a good friend in my class. Guess who is my favorite friend?
S2: Is your friend a girl?
S1: Yes, she is. She has a big nose.
S2: Does she have long hair?
S1: Yes, she does.
S2: Does she have small eyes?
S1: No, she doesn’t. Her eyes are big.
S2: Is she Lin Wen?
S1: Yes, you are right.
3. (看2部分，听录音填数字，要求学生使用has句型进行核对。做得好的给予掌声鼓励。完成2。)
T: Nice work. Now let’s look at the kids with masks on Page 27. They’re Maria, Michael, Wang Junfeng, Kangkang, Linda and Jane. Can you guess what they look like? Next, please listen to 2 and match the following phrases with the right numbers. Then describe the kids with the sentence patterns: Maria has a small mouth. She has a small mouth.(核对答案时教师可以有意识地用be动词来重复学生的答案，并板书。)
T: OK. Let’s check your answers one by one. S3, please.
S3: Kangkang has a big head. He has a big head.
T: Yes. That’s right. His head is big. S4, please.
S4: Jane has a small face. She has a small face.
T: Right. Her face is small. S5, please.
S5: Wang Junfeng has small eyes. He has small eyes.
T: Good. His eyes are small. S6, please.
S6: Linda has long hair. She has long hair.
T: Very good. Her hair is long.
(板书句型，引导学生使用be动词来描述人物的外貌特征，并提醒学生注意人称代词主格和形容词性物主代词之间的替换。)
He has big eyes.→His eyes are big.
She has long hair.→Her hair is long.
T: Well. What about Kangkang? S7, please.
S7: Kangkang has a big nose. He has a big nose.
T: Is that right?
Ss: Yes. His nose is big.
T: Good. Now let’s practice the drills with your partner.
(根据黑板上的信息，让学生使用be动词描述2中人物的外貌特征。)
Example:
I have a round face.→My face is round.
4. (教师利用简笔画或图片帮助学生完成3。教师可向学生说明描述人的外貌有多种方式并要求学生掌握。)
T: Look at me. My face is round./I have a round face. Now look at the picture in 3 on Page 28 and rewrite the sentences using have or has. Then make more sentences. Finish 3.
Step 4 Practice 第四步 练习(时间:8分钟)
让学生听录音，模仿语音语调，为学生的口语交际打下良好的语音基础，完成4。完成5a，5b，进一步巩固身体部位的名称，通过游戏活跃课堂气氛，激发学生学习英语的兴趣。
1. (听4录音，教师要求学生学会判断和标注升降调。完成4。)
T: Listen to 4 and learn how to judge and mark the intonation.
A: Who’s that girl?
B: She’s my friend, Mary.
A: Look, she has a small face, big eyes and a small nose.
B: That’s right.
(板书look，要求学生掌握。)
look
2. (听1a，标出升降调。练习语音语调。然后核对答案。)
T: Listen to 1a and mark the intonation.
3. (完成5b，巩固5a。教师说明游戏规则：当听到Bobby says时才能做动作。把学生分成四大组，先小组操练后每组选出一名代表上讲台，由教师发出指令，四名学生做动作，做错的淘汰，选出最终获胜者，教师给予奖励。)
Step 5 Project 第五步 综合探究活动(时间:8分钟)
通过真实的任务，帮助学生熟练运用本课所学的目标语言。
1. (做猜谜游戏。)
(这个游戏是通过问与答来猜测对方的要好朋友。游戏内容：一位同学事先在纸上写下同班中要好同学的姓名，折好交给另一个同学，让这位同学猜测到底是谁，允许这位同学提三个有关外表的问题，然后通过回答判断，最后打开纸张看是否猜对。)
T: OK. Let’s begin.
S1: I have a good friend in our class. He is a boy. Guess! Who?
S2: Does he have a big head?
S1: Yes, he does.
S2: Does he have small eyes?
S1: No, he doesn’t.
S2: Does he have a round face?
S1: Yes, he does.
S2: He is Lin Jing.
S1: Yes, you’re right. Great!
(如果回答为No，就打开纸张核对。然后同桌间继续进行猜谜游戏。)
2. (以My favorite teacher/classmate/friend/…为题，要求学生试用3中的不同句式描述人物的外貌特征。)
3. Homework:
(1)与同伴练习会话1a。
(2)复习Section A和Section B的单词。
(3)预习Section C单词。
(4)根据1a及3中的句式编对话。
板书设计：
I have a small nose.
Section B
1.—Does he have long hair? 2. Who is your favorite movie star?
—No, he doesn’t. It’s Bruce Lee.
—Does he have a wide mouth? Guess again.
—Yes, he does. 3.①Her hair is long. = She has long hair.
②His eyes are big. = He has big eyes.
Section C
The main activities are 1a and 2. 本课重点活动是1a和2。
Ⅰ. Teaching aims and demands 教学目标
1. Learn some new words and phrases:
come, come from, student, sister, different, knife, don’t=do not
2. Continue to learn the simple present tense with“have/has”:
(1)Do you have a knife?
Yes, I do.
(2)Do they have long legs?
No, they don’t. They have short legs.
(3)Does he have a ruler?
Yes, he does.
3.(1)Talk about the introduction and review the description of people’s appearances:
①I come from England.
②I’m a student.
③I have a sister.
④She has a round face, big eyes, a small nose and a small mouth.
(2)Talk about the similarity and differences:
We are in the same school, but in different grades.
Ⅱ. Teaching aids 教具
小黑板/纸/录音机/实物/小刀/图片
Ⅲ. Five-finger Teaching Plan 五指教学方案
Step 1 Review 第一步 复习(时间:10分钟)
通过复习，巩固表示人体部位的单词，提高学生的表达能力。
1.(教师出示一块小黑板，同时叫学生拿出预先准备好的纸和笔，先看示范，然后在纸上作图：head, hair, nose, mouth, ears, eyes, legs, arms, feet。注:可以画出不同的姿势，学生边画边用英语说出所画部位，教师巡视并督促学生大声说出单词，然后在全班范围内对所画的图进行介绍，如big eyes, a small nose, a wide mouth等。)
T: Let’s draw a picture of the people. Take out your paper and pens, and follow me. Begin! Head.
Ss: Head.(让学生边画边说。)
T: Hair.
Ss: Hair.
(复习巩固表示人体部位的单词，最后展示画得的，并给予鼓励。)
2. (1)(教师让两个学生以“Who is your favorite friend in your class?”为话题，根据Section B中的1a编对话并表演。)
T: Make a conversation to talk about“Who is your favorite friend in your class?”. Please go.
S1: Oh, I have a good friend in our class.
S2: A boy?
S1: No. She is a girl. She has a big nose.
S2: Does she have long hair?
S1: No, she doesn’t. She has short hair.
S2: Does she have small eyes?
S1: No, she doesn’t. Her eyes are big.
S2: Is she Hu Xue?
S1: Yes, you’re right.
(2)(利用学生的表演内容，师生互动问答，导入新句型。)
T: Come to the front, please, Hu Xue.
Hu Xue: OK!
T: Can you introduce yourself including your appearances?
Hu Xue: OK! My name is Hu Xue. I’m a girl. I’m thirteen years old. I’m from China. I have a big nose and big eyes. My hair is short.
T: Great. Are you a Chinese teacher?
Hu Xue: No. I’m not a teacher, but I’m a …
T: Good. You’re not a teacher. You’re a student. Do you have a big nose?
Hu Xue: Yes, I do.(教师帮助学生回答“I do”)
T: Do you have small eyes?
Hu Xue: No, I don’t.(教师帮助学生回答don’t，并说明don’t=do not。)
T: Do you have a sister?
Hu Xue: Yes, I do.
T: Are you in the same school?
Hu Xue: No, we’re not in the same school.
T: Good. You can also say “we’re in different schools”. Do you come from China?
Hu Xue: Yes, I do.
T: Thank you. Go back to your seat and sit down.
(板书生词，分析并强调相近或相反的词、词组，加快记忆。然后带领学生朗读并要求掌握，板书新句型。)
student (teacher) Do you have …?
sister (brother) Yes, I do.
different (same) Do you have small eyes?
come from=be from No, I don’t.
do/don’t(=do not)
3. (教师通过介绍，导入1a，并设置听力任务。)
T: I know a boy. He has a sister. Do you want to know what the boy and his sister look like? Now listen to 1a.
Step 2 Presentation 第二步 呈现(时间:7分钟)
学习1a，培养学生的阅读理解能力。
1. (让学生听1a录音，然后回答问题。)
T: Listen to the tape carefully, and then answer the questions.
(板书)
(1) Is the boy a student?
(2) How old is his sister?
(核对答案)
T: Is he a student?
Ss: Yes, he is.
T: Right. How old is his sister?
Ss: Twelve.
T: Yes. You’re right. Now listen again and repeat. When you’re reading, you can underline the key words.
2. (根据短文里的关键词，完成1b，巩固1a所学知识。)
(找出正确图片后，让学生归纳描述人物外貌特征的关键词语并板书。)
T: Please find the key phrases in 1a.
英语七年级教案 篇8
教学目标
能够掌握常见物品的英文表达
能够询问教室物品或文具名称并找到物主
能够综合运用所学句型汇报活动结果
教学向导
语言目标 学习策略与思维技巧 重点词汇
运用this /that 的一般疑问句及其答句；What 引导的特殊疑问句及其简略回答。 以游戏的形式，做出推理与判断，培养综合分析能力。 pencil, pen, book, eraser, pencil-case, backpack, ruler, key,ID card, baseball, watch, game, ring, computer, notebook
语言结构 语言功能 跨学科学习
Demonstratives this, that;
What questions;
Yes/No questions and short answers
How do you spell pencil?
(Formulaic) 寻找物主 培养学生绘画和写作能力
主题词表
pencil, pen, book, eraser, pencil-case, backpack, ruler, key, ID card, baseball, watch, game, ring, computer, notebook
Extensive words:
textbook; exercise-book; ball-pen; compass; sharpener; rubber; glue; color-pen; sticker; highlight; ball-point; scissors; chalk; file; blackboard; ink; set- square; paper; pamphlet; peg.
重点句型
(1)Is this your pencil? Yes, it is./No, it isn’t.
(2)Is that my book? Yes, it is./ No, it isn’t.
(3)Is this/that her/his eraser? Yes, it is./ No, it isn’t.
(4)What’s this/ that in English? It’s a/an ……
(5)How do you spell pen? P-E-N.
主题思维图及任务型活动
课前准备
让学生收集并自学有关文具或教室物品的名词，并准备一些实物或图片。教师事先应对学生常用的文具有所了解，同时收集部分同学的物品，对于不能出示实物的用具则应准备一些简图。让学生挑选一件自己喜欢物品的实物或图片，并为该它制作一个英文标签，即写出该物品的英文名称；教师也可根据将学生学习新词时感觉困难的词语，制作自己的标签，将其放入学生的物品中；同时为各小组准备好活动用的纸盒或袋子。
Task One: Lead in---Learning words.
教学目的：学习有关文具的英文表达方式
需要学习和掌握的新单词与新句型：pencil, pen, book, eraser, pencil-case, backpack, ruler, key, ID card, baseball, watch, game, ring, computer, notebook
1. Is this your pencil? Yes, it is./No, it isn’t.
2. Is that my book? Yes, it is./ No, it isn’t.
3. Is this/that her/his eraser? Yes, it is./ No, it isn’t.
4. What’s this/ that in English? It’s a/an ……
5. How do you spell pen? P-E-N.
Step 1: 出示实物或图片，问学生What’s this/ that in English?导入Task One中新词。(pencil, pen, book, eraser, pencil-case, backpack, ruler, key, ID card, baseball, watch, game, ring, computer, notebook )板书目标词汇。
Step 2: 抽取学生中的文具由学生问，学生答；复习上一步所学单词。
Step 3: 从学生中收取一部分文具，引入句型Is this your pencil? Yes, it is./No, it isn’t.
或Is that my book? Yes, it is./ No, it isn’t. etc.
Task Two: Guessing game( Finding the owners)
教学目的：巩固目标词汇和Is this your pencil?
Yes, it is./No, it isn’t. etc.
复习What’s this/ that in English? It’s a/an ……
How do you spell pen? P-E-N.
Step 1: 每位学生将自己准备好的物品放进一个袋子里。
Step 2: 教师与一位学生做示范。为接下来的Group work 作铺垫。需要用到的句型打在屏幕上。
Step 3: 学生开始做Group work。
Step 4: 展示各小组统计的结果，看哪组同学在规定时间内猜出的物品的主人最多。
Task Three: Competition.
教学目的：培养学生在一定语境下综合运用目标语的能力。
Step 1: 在小组内部将各自的文具汇集到一处。运用句型：This is my …….
Step 2: 交换小组成员。来自外组的同学负责寻找相关文具的主人。运用句型：Is this your……? Is this Jane’s ……?
Step 3: 完成下表并由Group Leader 进行汇报。
stationery
Owner sharpener Pencilcase eraser dictionary
Homework:
Write down a dialogue using the words and the target languages.
Preview the content of the next period.
Blackboard writing
Unit 2 Is this your pencil?
What’s this /that in English? It’s a/an……
How do you spell…?
Is this your/Tina’s backpack?
Yes, it is. / No, it isn’t. It’s his/Mary’s.
英语七年级教案 篇9
七年级英语备课教案4篇
英语老师应抓住学生爱说爱闹、敢想敢说的心理特点，创造一个开放宽松的教学环境。经过一段时间的英语教学，对于一篇初一七年级英语教案你知道如何写吗？你是否在找正准备撰写“七年级英语备课教案”，下面小编收集了相关的素材，供大家写文参考！
七年级英语备课教案篇1
Language Goal:
Talk about what people are doing.
Teaching Aims:
The present Progressive (结构式: Be + V-ing )
Key Points:
---What’s he doing ?
---He’s reading.
Difficult points:
现在进行时的用法和动词V-ing 形式的构成。
Teaching Methods:
由浅入深,设置场景、对话以及表演来教授新句型。
Teaching Aids:
教学图片、教学光盘、VCD机、录音机
Teaching Procedures:
Step1. Warming – up
A. Duty report
Teacher: How are you, boys and girls?
S s : Fine, thank you.
Teacher: OK, who’s on duty today?
(the student who is on duty starts to make a duty report)
B. Ask and answer
(The teacher asks some Ss to answer questions and writes down the verbs in the sentences on the blackboard.)
T: Usually, what time do you go to school?
S1: ……
T: When does your father watch TV in the evening?
S2: ……
T: Do you do your homework in the evening?
S3: ……
T: When do you play soccer?
S4: ……
T: what time do you usually eat dinner?
S5: ……
(The teacher should encourage the students after questions.)
The teacher ask the students to read these five verbs for several times.
Step 2. Presentation
A. Match the words and the activities.
Ask the students to turn to page 83, and look at the pictures in 1a.
Then,the teacher ask questions:
----What’s he doing? (Picture 1)
----He’s making a telephone call.
(Help the students answer the question with body language .)
Ask and answer just like that, and finish 1a.(Ss can guess the meaning of doing homework, watching TV, cleaning, eating dinner and reading.)
The Ss read these V-ing words after the teacher.
B. Play the video.
To make the Ss clear what they are learning in this class. Mr. Gong’s words do give the teacher a big hand.
(Write down the title of Unit 14 I’m watching TV on the blackboard and ask the Ss to read it.)
C. Teach the Present Progressive.
1. Introduction
Tell the Ss what the Present Progressive is. (现在进行时表示现在正在进行或发生的动作, 它的表现形式为Be Verbs + V-ing ---- 这也即为它的结构式.)
2. Tell the difference
Write down the V-ing forms by another lines of go, watch, do, play and eat on the blackboard. Ask the Ss to have a look and find the difference between them. For example: go and going, watch and watching, do and doing, etc. Then, ask the Ss to read them again.
3. Listen to the tape.
Let the Ss get ready to listen to the tape (paper and ball-point pen).
Check the answer: 2 4 1
4. Activities.
The teacher acts several actions and say :”What am I doing?”, help Ss answer: ”I’m opening the door.”
(The other actions: look at someone, clean the window)
Write down the three sentences on the blackboard, and ask the Ss to pay attention to the important words underlined:
n What am I doing?
n I’m opening the door.
n What am I doing?
n I’m looking at him.
n What am I doing?
n I’m cleaning the window.
5. Pairwork.
Ask and answer questions about what people are doing in the picture.
u What’s he doing?
u He’s reading.
The Ss can practice different sentences upon the verbs on the blackboard.
6. Guessing game.
The teacher prepare several pieces of paper and there are different actions on it. Ask a pair of Ss to act it out. (Each pair of Ss choose two pieces of paper and act.)
(The Ss must like to do it, so the teacher can ask many pairs to do this game and, the Ss can be familiar with the Present Progressive step by step. They can have fun in the classroom during this class, it’s the most important.)
7. Self-assessment.
The teacher prepare for the Ss some listening exercises, and play the cassette, let them finish these exercises at once. Then, check the answer. The Ss can understand whether they have learned about the Present Progressive.
8. Do the exercises.
The teacher have the Ss some exercises, and ask the Ss to do at once.
--What’s Li Lei doing?
-- He_____________. ( read )
--What’s his mother doing?
--She_____________. ( write )
--What are they doing?
--They_____________. ( play soccer)
--What are David and Mary doing?
--They_____________. (have dinner)
--What’s Jenny doing?
--She______________. ( run )
(In fact, the Ss don’t have enough time to finish the exercises, so they can go on and finish these exercises after class.
Step 3. Homework
1. Finish the exercises in the class.
2. Make a conversation and act it out with your partner.
Step 4. The end
T: You are very good today, boys and girls! And thank you for listening. Bye.
七年级英语备课教案篇2
教学目标
1. Match the vocabulary: sales assistant. Doctor. Actor. Reporter. Police. Officer. Waiter. Bank clerk. student
2. Master and use: What do you do? What does he do? Does he work in hospital?
教学重难点
重点
1. The vocabulary
2. language: What does she do? She is a doctor.
难点Use the language to ask for the jobs
教学工具
课件
教学过程
Step 1
Oranization1’ Organize students to prepare for the class
Step 2
Free talk 2’ Oral practice: Games, words that describe jobs, such as exciting, dangerous, boring The students talk about freely
Step 3
Presentation 8’ 1. Let students look at the picture and guess the jobs. The teacher describes the jobs and let students guess what. Ask job does the person have? Where does the person work?
2. Then use explanations and short sample sentences to help students understand what each word means. For example, Exciting means very interesting and very fast-moving.
A police officer has an exciting job.
3. Let students practice. Such as: He is a police officer. It’s an exciting job.
4. Listen to the conversation. What jobs do Betty, Jenny, and Sam want? Then write the jobs below.
5. Listen again. Why are Betty, Jenny, and Sam interested in these jobs? Complete the chart above.
6. Listen to the tape: Listen and number the picture(1-3) below.
Then practise the dialogue.
7. Grammar focus: 1.叫学生口头造句用一些有关职业的句子。争取大部分的同学都有回答的机会，多次重复加大练习。
2. 教师边让学生读句子边解释这些句子的意思。
3. 叫学生口头练习一些有关这方面的句子。
4. 听录音，让学生填写表格，然后再纠正答案。
5. 分组练习，让学生大面积的练习。
6. 让学生朗读Gammar Focus
Step 4
Practice 6’ 7. Read the newspaper want ads. And fill in the blanks with the correct jobs.
One: Wanted: Do you like to work late? Do you like to work hard? Do you like to meet people? If your answer is “Yes”, then we have a job for you as a …… 给学生一定的时间，让他们充分练习。学生小组讨论和练习。让大部分的同学都有机会来表演。
Step 5
Summary 2’ Words and phrases of this class Language:
本节课主要是听录音来完成各种对话，充分让学生学会职业的文法以及地点的表达法。 以提问的形式来进行复习总结，在让学生有一个巩固的机会。
Step 6 test 4’ 1、Self check(见后面) 让学生做后再讲解答案
Step 7 Consolidation 4’ 在这节课例我们主要听录音然后回答问题，让学生充分练习听力，达到会听、会说然后在自己编对话来练习。
Step 8
Homework Read the newspaper more and more. 让学生朗读3A部分的内容。
课后小结
学了这节课，你有什么收获?
课后习题
完成课后练习题。
板书
Unit 4 I want to be an actor
七年级英语备课教案篇3
教学目标
知识与技能
(1)熟练掌握下列词汇：
rules, arrive, late, hall, dinning hall, listen, , fight, sorry outside,wear, important, bring, uniform, quiet
(2)熟练掌握下列短语：
dining hall, arrive late for school, (be) on time, listen to music break the rules, in class, be/ keep quiet, a lot of, bring …to…，wear a hat, have to, music players
(3)掌握下列句型：
1. Don't eat in class.
2. You must be on time.
3. Eat in the dining hall.
4. 正确使用情态动词can, can’t
——Can we wear a hat in school?
——Yes, we can./No, we can’t.
5. 能正确使用have to 和 must 谈论规章制度
We must be on time/ We also have to be quiet in the library.
教学重难点
重点：
1) 肯定祈使句是省略掉主语的原形动词开头;
2) 否定祈使句则是在肯定祈使句前加上“don’t”。
3) 情态动词must及have to在用法上的区别。
难点：
掌握祈使句的用法，并能听懂、会说一些简单的祈使句。
教学工具
ppt
教学过程
一.新课预习
1.小组合作学习本课单词，根据汉语写出下列英语单词。
规则_______ 到达_________ 准时___________走廊___________
礼堂_________ 餐厅_______________倾听___________________
听……______________打架_______________抱歉的_____________ 非常重要_____________ 带来;拿来_________________
不得不_____________ 校服;制服_________________
2.试着翻译下列句子。
Don’t arrive late for class. ___________________________________
Don’t run in the hallways. ___________________________________
不要在教室里吃东西。___________________________________
不要在教室里听音乐。___________________________________
二. 情景导入
教师进教室后，使用祈使句请学生们完成一系列动作：
Please stand up/ sit down. Close the door, please. Look at me and listen to me.
Don’t open your books. Don’t talk. Let’s begin our class.
学生听教师的指令完成各种动作，教师也可将指令写到黑板上，让学生从视觉上考察祈使句的特点。
三.合作探究
1.教师出示书上1a 的图片，向学生提问。
指着图上奔跑的男孩提问
T：What’s the boy doing? S: He’s running.
T: Where is he running? S: He’s running in the hallways.(板书，教读)
T：Can you run in the hallways? S: No, I can’t.
T: So please don’t run in the hallways.(板书，教读)
(= You can’t run in the hallways.)
学生跟读数遍，明白祈使句和“can”的表达含意。
T：Why is he running in the hallways? S: He’s late.
T: Oh, he’s late for class.(板书，教读)
You can’t arrive late for class.(板书，教书) = Don’t arrive late for class.
…
on 1a
学生看图，完成1a的内容，检查答案并大声朗读校规。
3. Listening
学生们听录音，完成1b，选出四位学生都违反了哪条校规;听之前，学生要读会英文名。
Check the answers:
4. Pair work
学生朗读1c部分的句型;两人一组对话表演，学生可经过讨论，多说出他们想到的校规，不必只限于书上.
5. Listening
Work on 2a:
First, read the sentences in 2a together.
Ss listen to the recording and check the activities they hear.
Play the recording again for the Ss to check the answers.
Work on 2b:
Listen to the recording again. Can Alan and Cindy do these activities? Circle can or can't above.
Check the answers:
6. Pair work
Talk about the rules in 2a.
Let some students come to the front and act out the conversations.
课后小结
点拨总结
1.arrive late for school/ be late for school/ come to school late 上学迟到
2.arrive in/ at + 地点 in class 在课堂上
get to + 地点 in the classroom 在教室里 wear “穿着，戴着” be in + 颜色(穿......颜色的衣服) sound “听起来”系动词后接形容词
3. 祈使句的用法:祈使句是用来表示请求，命令，叮嘱，邀请，劝告等的句子，一般以动词原形开头。
a) V型祈使句(以行为动词开头) Listen to me，please. 请听我说.
b) B型祈使句(以Be开头) Be careful!小心!
c) L型祈使句(以Let开头)Let me help you. 让我帮助你.
d) D型祈使句(以Don’t+动词原形开头) Don’t talk in class.
4、must和have 的区别
must “必须”(强调主观意志);没有人称和数的变化;否定：mustn’t “不准”
have to “必须”(强调客观因素)三人称用：has to; 否定：don’t/ doesn’t have to
5. a lot of= lots of/ many/ much
6. bring sth. to sb.“带…来…”= bring sb. sth.
课后习题
训练评价
一、单项选择
( )1.-- Don’t run in the room. -- ,Uncle.
A. Excuse me B. Sorry C. No
( )2. Peter wear sports shoes for the gym class today.
A. have to B. has C. has to
( )3. Our teacher us not to arrive late for the class.
A. says B. talks C. tells
( )4. -- we have to clean the classroom after school? --Yes, you .
A. Can, can B. Do, have C. Do, do
( )5.You can’t eat outside. It’s dirty.
A. in B. at C. /
2. 完成下列句型转换试题
1)I can play computer games on weekends.(一般疑问句)
_________________________________? Yes, ____________.
2) He has to wear uniform.(变否定句)
He _____ _____ _____ wear uniform.
3) I have to wear sneakers for gym class.(一般疑问句)
_____ you ____ ____ wear sneakers for gym class? Yes, I ____.
4) They have to wash clothes.(提问) ____ do they have ____ ____?
5) You can’t go out on school nights.(换一种表达) _______ go out on school nights.
6) Don’t talk in class.(同上) No _________________________.
七年级英语备课教案篇4
教学目标
1、语言目标
◆ 掌握部分有关电视节目以及表示装饰的词汇，如：soap opera, sitcom, sports show, host, super, agree, hair clip, key ring, belt, wallet etc.
◆ What do you think of…? 句式在不同人称中的使用及其几种不同的答语方式，并能简单陈述理由。
◆ 掌握运用love, like, don’t like, don’t mind, can’t stand恰当表达对有关事物的观点和态度。
2、能力目标
◆ 学会陈述自己的看法和意见。
◆ 学会谈论自己的喜好。
◆ 谈谈流行文化，了解各类电影和电视节目的名称。
◆ 了解一些日常生活用品，描述对其喜好程度。
3、策略目标
利用不同媒体获取相关的学习资源，通过合作、探究的方式学习;学会正确评价自己的学习行为和学习效果。
4、情感目标
◆ 学会客观地评价事物。
◆ 正确表达自己的意见。
◆ 正确认识流行文化。
◆ 了解中西文化在表达自己的观点时存在很大差异——我们比较委婉，而西方人则更直接一些。
教学重难点
1、重点
学习及掌握陈述自己的看法，意见及喜好的词汇和基本句型。
2、难点
正确运用What do you/does he/she think of…?及I love/like/don’t like/don’t mind/can’t stand ... He/She loves/likes/doesn’t like/doesn’t mind/can’t stand ...等句型结构来表达对客观事物的评价。
教学工具
课件
教学过程
Step1 Warming up : Chant
What do you think of talk shows?
I don’t mind them.
What about game shows?
I love them.
Do you like sitcoms?
Yes, I do.
Step 2 Revision: Dialogue show time
注：1. Dialogue show后要鼓励学生给予comments。可以引导学生在以下几方面评价：
What do you think of their dialogue?
Body language
pronunciation
intonation
2.如有许多Pairs想上来show，可以用一个chant确定：
1,2,3,4 Mary is at the kitchen door.
5,6,7,8 Mary is at the garden.
Step 3 Presentation
1. Listen and do 2a, 2b.
借助Dialogue show 及过渡句“Have you seen the sitcom Dumpling King引出听力
2. 做完2a,2b后，问：
What does he think of Dumpling King?
What does he think of Er Bao
Xiao Bao ?
Sitcoms
呈现新的句型。
Step 4 Information exchange
Student A looks at one paper, student B looks at the other paper.(Don’t look at his/her partner’s paper)
运用句型结构：What does Alan/Yang Lin think of these TV shows?交流信息。
Step 5 Task(1)：
Weekend Talk show
学生三人一组，分别扮演角色 host/hostress和guests，电视访谈节目的演示，谈论对不同TV shows的看法，但老师先要给予Talk show的model。
A: Welcome to 9 o’clock weekend Talk show.
We’re talking to….Welcome to the show…
B: Thank you.
A: Do you like to watch TV?
B:
A: What do you think of sports shows?
B:
A: How about…?
B:
A: OK! Thanks for joining us. Next, we’re talking to…
Step 6 Task (2)：Survey time
列举常见TV Shows的名称，调查并统计班内同学对各种节目的观点。四人小组以统计图表的形式(学生可以creative一些，设计各种统计图表)呈现结果，再给TV station写一封调查报告，并提些建议。
统计时，增加句型：I do, too.
I don’t, either.
Step7 Homework
1. Finish your diagram and stick on the board.
2. Finish writing the letter to the TV station.
课后小结
学了这节课，你有什么收获?
课后习题
完成课后练习题。
板书
Unit 11 What do you think of game shows?
英语七年级教案 篇10
第一课时
教学目标：
1、了解作者和常见的文体。
2、掌握生字词的音、形、义。
3、朗读课文，复述和归纳故事情节。
教学重点：
朗读课文，复述和归纳故事情节。
教学难点：
朗读课文，复述和归纳故事情节
教学手段：
多媒体、课件
课时安排：
3课时（第1课时）
教学内容及步骤：
一、看公益广告《帮母亲洗脚》，您感受到了什么？
二、展示学习目标
1、了解作者和常见的文体。
2、掌握生字词的音、形、义。
3、朗读课文，复述和归纳故事情节
三、介绍作者和文体。
莫怀戚，1951年出生，重庆人，中国作家协会会员。笔名：周平安、章大明。1982年毕业于四川大学中文系。曾任教于重庆师范学院中文系，著有小说集《诗礼大家》、《大律师现实录》、长篇小说《经典关系》、《透支时代》。
文体的分类。
三、给读一读、写一写注音并齐读两遍。
分歧（ ） 信服（ ） 拆散（ ）霎（ ）时
水波粼粼（ ）嫩（ ）芽 熬（ ）过 酷冬（ ）
四、给多音字注音并齐读两遍并勾勒解释。
散（sàn散步 sǎn散文） 累(lěi长年累月 lèi 劳累 léi赘)
熬：忍受，艰苦支持。文中指母亲又挺过了一个冬天。
委屈：受到不应有的指责或待遇，心里难过，这里是指使儿子受到委屈的意思；
粼粼：形容水波十分明净；
五、朗读课文。
六、找文章的故事人物、发生的时间和地点、事件。
七、作业；
抄写读一读、写一写、多音字解释。
第二课时
教学目标：
1、反复诵读课文，了解课文内容。
2、分析人物形象，景物描写的作用。
3、体会文章中流淌着的浓浓的亲情，培养自己的社会责任感
教学重点：
整体感知课文内容，体会文章所表达的思想感情。
教学难点：
理解文中具有象征意义的关键语句。
教学手段：
多媒体课件
课时安排：
3课时（第2课时）
教学内容及步骤：
一、复习归纳事件的方法
二、展示学习目标
1、反复诵读课文，了解课文内容。
2、分析人物形象，景物描写的作用。
3、体会文章中流淌着的浓浓的亲情，培养自己的社会责任感
三、分析人物形象
找出人物描写的句子进行分析。
集体归纳：
我--孝敬、有家庭责任感、讲原则、不宠爱孩子
文中的“我”是上有老，下有小，要照顾两头的中年男人。在处理家庭矛盾时候，有时可以兼顾两头，但有时无无法兼顾两头。如文中是走大路还是走小路，无法“两全”，只能顾一头的时候，那么顾那一头呢？“决定委屈儿子”就是要顾老一头。因为陪伴儿子的时间还长，但父母风烛残年，尽孝心的时间不多。
母亲--谦让、疼爱孙子、善解人意
即使自己行动多不方便，也宠爱孙子；“她现在很听我的话，就像我小时候很听她的话一样” --信赖儿子，尊重儿子；“但是母亲摸摸孙子的小脑袋，变了主意：“还 是走小路吧！”
所以这里有个家庭伦理道德准则：上有老，下有小，两头无法兼顾时，应该顾老一头。
妻子--贤良、孝顺、家庭责任感
“在外面，她总是听我的”--贤良，当“我决定委屈儿子”，妻子没有丝毫的执着；“我蹲下，背起母亲，妻子也蹲下来，背起了儿子”
儿子--调皮、活泼可爱、聪明、听话
“儿子要走小路，小路有意思”；“前面也是妈妈和儿子，后面也是妈妈和儿子”；当“我决定委屈儿子”时，儿子并没有哭闹，对此变现出非常地听话和理解。
四、景物描写的作用
1、“大块大块的新绿”有浓有淡，“树上的嫩芽也密了”，“田野的冬水也咕咕地起了水泡”。
这“新绿”、这“嫩芽”、这“水泡”，分明是春的气息的透露，它显示了不可遏制的生机，这是对生命的高歌，对生命力的礼赞。
“金色的菜花，整齐的桑树，水波粼粼的鱼塘，这是春天在召唤，生命在召唤。”
是啊，尽管“今年的春天来得太迟”、“一些老人挺不住”，“但春天总算来了”，母亲也总算“又熬过了一个严冬”，这字里行间流露的正是一种对生活的酷爱、对生命的珍爱。春天来了，一切都要从头开始。正该抖擞精神，以充沛的活力投入新的生活，迎接美好的明天。
五、理解文中具有象征意义的关键语句
1、“她现在很听我的话，就像我小时候很听她的话一样。”
一个“慈母”，“一个孝子”，一个真诚的理解，一个绝对的信任，这种良性的因果循环正反映了古朴的伦理道德之美。
2、“我”蹲下身子，背起了母亲；妻子也蹲下来，背起了儿子。“我和妻子都是慢慢地，稳稳地，走得很仔细，好像我背上的同她背上的加起来，就是整个世界。”
夸张、从字面上看，这是形容他们走得小心，走的是小路，唯恐哪一步有闪失，特别是母亲，是经不起摔跌的，非稳当不可。从形象上看，很有象征意义，中年的责任，既要赡养老一代，又要抚养下一代，一个家庭是这样，一个民族，一个国家，全世界又何尝不是这样？
六、作业：完成练习册
第三课时
教学目标：
1、反复诵读课文，理解题目的好处，并自拟题目，指出好处。
2、体会对称句子的妙用。
3、体会文章中流淌着的浓浓的亲情，培养自己的社会责任感。
教学重点：
1、反复诵读课文，理解题目的好处，并自拟题目，指出好处。
2、体会对称句子的妙用。
教学难点：
题目和对称句子的运用。
教学手段：
多媒体课件
教学内容及步骤：
一、复习上节课的内容。
二、展示学习目标
1、反复诵读课文，理解题目的好处，并自拟题目，指出好处。
2、体会对称句子的妙用。
3、体会文章中流淌着的浓浓的亲情，培养自己的社会责任感。
三、理解题目的好处，并自拟题目，指出好处。
1、用事件作题目：《散步》
2、用中心作题目：《爱》《背起整个世界》
3、关联事物作题目：《初春、田野、这一家子》
4、用加法作题目：《走大路+走小路=爱或责任》
四、对称句子的妙用。
“前面也是妈妈和儿子，后面也是妈妈和儿子。”这个句子虽然不是写景，但我喜欢。猜猜老师喜欢它原因？
形式对称，音韵和谐，相映成趣，清新淡雅
五、总结。
“哺育子女是动物也有的本能，赡养父母才是人类的文化之举，这个，全世界数中国人做得最好。”愿同学们把这种我们民族引以为豪的传统美德代代相传，平时身体力行，把它渗透到生活的点点滴滴，用心去孝敬你的父母，体谅他们的每一份苦心。
六、作业。
以爱为话题的作文片段练习。
周健
英语七年级教案 篇11
一、教学设计思路
结合学生生活设计教学活动，帮助学生掌握日期和生日表达法;利用视频歌曲等辅助教学，提起学生兴趣，加深学生印象。
二、教学目标
(一)知识
1.掌握日期表达法(月份、日期、序数词)：monthsoftheyear,ordinalnumber1st-31st
2.掌握生日的相关表达法：Whenisyour/his/herbirthday?My/His/Herbirthdayis…
(二)能力
能够通过网络等手段查找名人生日等相关资料。
(三)情感
学会合理地安排自己的时间，做时间的主人。
三、教学重点
日期表达法：monthsoftheyear,ordinalnumber1st-31st
四、教学难点
日期表达法：monthsoftheyear,ordinalnumber1st-31st
五、教学媒体
日历或挂历，电脑，投影仪
六、教学过程
(一)巧妙导入
拿出日历或挂历展示，引入月份的话题。
(二)结合生活，互动练习
方法1:每次英语课上都与学生谈论一下和日期，这样会使学生不知不觉熟悉相关知识。
方法2:带领学生听一些有关生日和日期的歌曲，使学生通过唱歌熟悉日期表达法。(参考“视频资源”和“优秀课件”)
方法3:提前让学生每人带一本日历。学生两人一组，指着日历上的一天询问对方日期，一人连问对方五个问题，看看谁答上来用的时间最短。
方法4:统计学生生日，并比较谁和谁的生日最近，谁的年龄最小等。
方法5:带领学生设计班级活动的时间表。
jK251.com其他人还在看
仁爱七年级英语教案
我们听了一场关于“仁爱七年级英语教案”的演讲让我们思考了很多，经过阅读本页你的认识会更加全面。老师会对课本中的主要教学内容整理到教案课件中，所以老师写教案可不能随便对待。教案是评估学生学习效果的有效依据。
仁爱七年级英语教案 篇1
Unit1 Topic 2
一、知识目标
【重要短语】
get lost 走失；迷路
hate to go shopping 讨厌去购物
hear from sb.=receive/ get a letter from sb.
收到某人的来信
be abroad 在国外
at least 至少
take place = happen 发生
one-child policy 独生子女政策
be strict with sb. 对某人要求严格
the population of China 中国的人口
live longer 活得更长
medical care 医疗保健
control the population 控制人口
be known / famous as 以……而闻名
work well in doing sth.做某事方面很有功效
have a long way to go 有很长的路要走
be short of 缺乏……
one of the greatest problems 最大问题之一
be in trouble 陷入麻烦中/ 在困境中
prefer boys to girls 重男轻女
offer sb. a good education
提供某人良好的教育
a couple of 一些 ;几个
even though = even if 即使
have a lot of pressure 有许多压力
the differences between A and B
A与B之间的区别
【重点句型】
1.We got lost and couldn’t find each other. 我们走失了，互相找不到对方。
2.It seems that their living conditions were not very good. 似乎他们的生活条件不是很好。
3.It is possible that Kangkang’s father was the only child in his family.
康康的父亲有可能是他家中的独生子。
4.One answer is known as the one-child policy. 其中一项众所周知的措施是独生子女政策.
5.And even though we have made a lot of progress, we have big pollution problems in the
city. 虽然我们已经取得了很大的进步，但是仍存在严重的城市污染问题。
【重要语法】
现在完成时常与下列表不明确的状语连用
1．already 和 yet
already “已经”（多用于肯定陈述句）。
如：He has already gone home. 他已经回家了。
yet “已经; 还”（用于否定句或疑问句）。
如：Have you found him yet? 你已经找到他了吗？
I haven’t finished my homework yet. 我还没完成作业。
※ already 也可用于疑问句，表“出乎意料或惊奇”
Have you finished your homework already? 难道你已经完成作业了？
2．ever 和 never
ever “曾经”（多用于疑问句，问初次经历）。
如：I have ever been abroad. 我曾出过国。
never“从未；从来不”（多用于否定陈述句），常回答ever的句型。
如：I have never seen him before.
----Has he ever been abroad? 他曾出过国吗？
----No, never. 不，从来不。
3．just
just “刚刚”（多用于肯定句，位于谓语动词之前）。
如： I have just tried to call you. 我刚刚打电话给你。
4．before
before “之前”（一般位于句末；常与never呼应）。
如：He says he has never seen such beautiful scenery before.
他说他以前从来没看过这么美的风景。
【词形转换】
possible (反义词)--impossible
rise (过去分词)--rose
conclude (名词)--conclusion
medicine (形容词)--medical
difficult(名词)--difficulty
less (反义词)--more
excellent (近义词)--great/good
different (名词)--difference
come (过去式)-came (过去分词)-come
see (过去式)-saw (过去分词)-seen
peace (形容词)--peaceful
二、要点讲评
1.---- I really hate to go shopping. 我真讨厌去购物。
---- So do I . 我也是。
So do I .为倒装句，表示前面提到的肯定情况也同样适合另外一个主体，表“某某也一样”，结构为“so + be /情态动词/ 助动词 + 主语”。
如：Jim is a student, so is Tom. 吉姆是一名学生，汤姆也是。
Jim can swim, so can Tom. 吉姆会游泳，汤姆也会。
Jim likes sports, so does Tom. 吉姆喜欢运动，汤姆也喜欢。
如表前面不怎样，后面“也不”怎样时，其结构为“ neither/ nor + be /情态动词/ 助动词 + 主语”。
如：Jim wasn’t Chinese, neither/ nor were they. 吉姆不中国人，他们也不是。
Jim can’t speak Japanese, neither can I . 吉姆不会说日语，我也不会。
Jim didn’t go there, neither did I . 吉姆没去那儿，我也没去。
如前后两句表达的是同一个主体，则不能倒装，表“的确如此”。
如：Jim is a good student. So he is. 吉姆是一名好学生，的确如此。
Jim swims well. So he does. 吉姆游泳很好，的确如此。
2.At that time, China was the country with the largest population in the world.
那时，中国是世界上人口最多的国家。
population为不可数名词，表示人口的多少只能用 “large”或 “small”修饰，提问人口用“what”.
如：The population of Shanghai is larger than that of Beijing. 上海的人口比北京多。
What’s the population of China?= How many people are there in China?
中国的人口有多少？
3. Great changes have taken place in China. 中国发生了巨大变化。
take place 指必然性的“发生”或有计划、安排之内的“举行”。
如：The meeting will take place next Friday. 会议将在下周五举行。
happen 指偶然的、没有预料的“发生“，其结果往往给人带来不幸或麻烦。
如：The accident happened yesterday. 事故发生在昨天。
※两者都不用于被动语态。
如：The population has increased a lot. 人口增长发很多。
4.increase 可作及物动词也可作不及物动词。其含义是“增长，增加，加强”等。
increase by… 指“增加了……”; increase to…指 “增加到……”
5. and about one fifth of the people in the world live in China.
而且世界上大约五分之一的人口生活在中国。
one fifth 是分数表达法。英文分数表达法：分子为基数词，分母为序数词，先读分子后读分母。当分子大于1时，分母的序数词则变为复数，直接在词尾加“s”。
如：one fourth四分之一three fourths 四分之三one second二分之一two thirds三分之二
6.It has worked well in controlling China’s population.
它在控制人口数量方面取得了显著的功效。
work well in doing sth. 表“在……方面很有功效”, 如:
如：Doing eye exercises works well in protecting our eyesight.
做眼保健操在保护视力方面很有功效。
7. Because of our large population, we are short of energy and water.
be short of… 表 “缺乏……”
如:She is always short of money at the end of every month. 每个月底她总是缺钱。
be short for… 表“是……的缩写”.
如:TV is short for television. TV是television的缩写形式.
8. Can all Chinese families offer their children a good education?
所有的中国家庭都能给他们的的孩子提供良好的教育吗？
offer 表“（主动）给予， 提供”
offer sb. sth. “提供某人某物”.
如：I offered him a glass of wine. 我敬了他一杯酒。
offer to do sth. “（主动）提出做某事”
如：She offered to cook for her mother. 她提出帮她妈妈煮饭。
I can’t go shopping in big stores unless I travel for a couple of hours.
我得花几个小时，才能到大的商场购物。
9. unless = if not 表“除非…; 如果不”，引导条件状语从句。
如：I won’t go unless I hear from you. = I won’t go if I don’t hear from you.
如果你不通知我，我就不去。
Unless Bill studies hard, he’ll fail in the exam. 如果比尔不努力, 他不会通过考试的.
10. a couple of… 表 “几个人或几件事”.
如:a couple of years ago 几年前; a couple of students 几个学生
couple 指任何两件同类的东西
如: a couple of watches 两只手表； five couples of cats 五对猫
11.pair 指两件不可分开使用的东西,它们可指两件互不相连的东西(鞋子、袜子等)，也可指
两部分构成的一件东西（裤子、剪刀等）。
如：a pair of shoes 一双鞋子a pair of pants 一条裤子
三、典型例解
( )1.-They have been to Australia.
-So _____ I.
A. do B. have been C. did D. have
分析：D 此句为so引导的完全倒装句。其含义为“A如此，B也如此。”其结构是so+be/助动词/情态动词+主语。本句为完成时态，其助动词是have。故选D。
( )2.The population of Shanghai is larger than _____ of Shenyang.
A. that B .it C. one D. this
分析：A 此句要用相同成分即上海的人口和沈阳的人口做比较。因为population是不可数名词，所以用that代替。如果是复数名词则要用those来代替。
( )3.-_____ the population of the U.S.A. in ?
-It _____ about 296 million.
A. What is; is B. What was; was
C. How many is; was D. How many was; is
分析：B 问人口的多少用what而不用how many。本题问的是的人口， 故为过去时态。
( )4._____ of the teachers are women in our school.
A. Two third B. Two threes C. Two thirds D. Second three
分析：C分数的表达法是基数词在前表示分子，序数词在后表示分母；当分子大于1时，表示分母的序数词要加s。
( )5.He’s read this book before, _____?
A. hasn’t he B. doesn’t he C .isn’t he D. wasn’t he
分析：A 本题考查反义疑问句反问部分的时态与人称的单复数要与陈述部分一致的用法。
( )6.The _____ population may be the greatest challenge of the world today.
A. increase B. increased C. increasing D. increases
分析：C 本题考查increase的现在分词作定语的情况，表示“正在增长的”。increased是它的过去分词也可作定语，但表示的是“已增长过的”。
( )7.The little girl has _____ finished reading the book you lent her.
A .already B. yet C. still D. once
分析：A already“已经”，常用覨t now.
分析：C 上句为否定情况，应用neither/nor+助动词+主语，表示“我也未参观过造纸厂”。
四、评价作业
I. 根据句子意思及首字母提示补全单词
1. ---No one likes “Little Emperors.” ---N___________ do my parents.
2. The cars in the cities are i____________ rapidly these days, so traffic jam comes into being.
3. People couldn’t live long because of poor medical t________________.
4. In China, some people in less developed areas p__________ boys to girls.DA被动语态。根据题中changes是复数，答句用完成时态。故选B。
( )9.Students today have a lot of pressure(压力) _____ they have to learn too much knowledge at school.
A. in order to B .unless C. because D .because of
分析：C in order to和because of后面不能接从句，unless不符合题意。故选C，用because。
( )10.-I have never visited a paper factory.
-_____
A. So have I. B. So I have. C. Neither have I. D.I haven’t now.
分析：C 上句为否定情况，应用neither/nor+助动词+主语，表示“我也未参观过造纸厂”。
四、评价作业
I. 根据句子意思及首字母提示补全单词
1. ---No one likes “Little Emperors.” ---N___________ do my parents.
2. The cars in the cities are i____________ rapidly these days, so traffic jam comes into being.
3. People couldn’t live long because of poor medical t________________.
4. In China, some people in less developed areas p__________ boys to girls.
5. His mother told him that the sun r__________ in the east and sets in the west.
II. 翻译词组，补全句子
1.We must ___________ ___________ (采取措施) to control the population.
2. Doing eye exercises ____________ __________ (起明显作用) in protecting our eyesight.
3. In 1960s, we were ________ _________ (缺乏) food and money .
4. He wouldn’t leave the TV set, __________ ___________ (既使) he was going to have an important exam the next day.
5.Her daughter __________ __________ (迷路) in the shopping center yesterday.
III. 完成下列句子的汉译英（每空1分，满分30分）
1.中国人口有多少？ 中国有大约13亿人口。
_______ the _________ _______ China ? China ______ a population of ______1.3 billion.
2. 为什么中国要实施独生子女政策？ 虽然跟以前比，中国人口增长放慢了，但人口问题依然严峻。
---Why does China _________ __________ with its __________ policy ?
---___________ its population is __________ _________ slowly than before, its population problem _________ ___________ quite ___________.
3. 这所学校里老师的数量是300人，其中四分之一是女教师。
_________ ___________ of the teachers in the school __________ 300, _________ ___________ of them ___________ women teachers.
4. 上周石油的价格增长了百分之二。 的确如些。
The price of oil ___________ ___________ 2% last week.
__________ _________ _____________.
5. 你生活在哪种家庭，是大家庭，还是小家庭？
_________ _________ of family are you ________, ________ family or _______ family ?
IV. 选择题
( ) 1. Two thirds of the surface of the earth ____ covered with water.
A. is B. are C. has
( ) 2. The number of workers in this factory _____ increasing.
A. are B. is C. will
( ) 3. ---It seems to me that you are very hard-working, Maria.
---I have to. I have a lot of _____ from my family and society.
A. time B. efforts C. pressure
( ) 4. ---______ have you done with the waste ?
---I have thrown it away.
A. How B. What C. Where
( ) 5. ---Which country has a ____ population, England or Germany ?
A. smaller B. less C. few
( ) 6. About one fifth of the people in the world _____ in China.
A. live B. is living C. has lived
( ) 7. ---Excuse me, is Joan in ?
---Sorry, she isn’t here. She ___ to the airport to see her parents off half an hour ago.
A. went B. has gone C. has been
( ) 8. ---Who will go to the airport to meet Jenny ?
---I will. I _____ her several times. I can find her easily.
A. met B. have met C. will meet
( ) 9. We are tired. We have studies for ____ hours.
A. a couple B. couple C. a couple of
( ) 10. The more excellent our public transportation is, _____ our life will be.
A. the happier B. the more happy C. the more happily
( ) 11. ---What did Jeff say about the lost girl ?
---He said that he had seen her _______.
A. three days agoB. three days before C. for three days
( ) 12. ---Dad, my teacher said I had made a lot of progress recently.
---I’m glad to hear that. But I think you still _______.
A. have a long way to go B. have a rest C. live in the present
( ) 13. ---I went swimming last Sunday.
---_________. I like it very much.
A. So I do B. So I did C. So did I
( ) 14. ---We haven’t been to the Great Wall. ---_________.
A. So has she B. Nor she has C. Neither has she
( ) 15. ---Did you know _______?
---They had a quarrel about the answer to the question.
A. what did they happen B. what happened to them C. what they happened
参考答案
I. 根据句子意思及首字母提示补全单词
1. Neither 2. increasing 3. treatment 4.prefer 5. rises
II. 翻译词组，补全句子
1. take measures 2. works well 3. short of 4. even though 5. got lost
III. 完成下列句子的汉译英
1 What’s the population of, has, about / around
2. carry on, one-child, Though, growing more, still seems , serious
3. The number, is, a quarter, are
4.increased by, So it did
5. What kind/ sort / type, in, extended, nuclear
IV. 选择题
1----5 ABCBA 6----10 AABCA 11----15 BACCB
仁爱七年级英语教案 篇2
Unit1 Topic 2 Where are you from?
学习目标：
1.学习数字0-10 及短语zero, one, two, three, four, five, six, seven, eight, nine, ten ,telephone, number
What’s his telephone number?
His telephone number is (010)8267-6790.
3.了解单词音节和重音。做到语音正确。
2. (朗读句子，并标出语调,巩固be from在不同人称的应用，复习国家名称。) Step2 问题导学 A.选择最佳答案
( )1 —Are they from Canada? —No, they ____.
( )2. —What’s ____ telephone number?
—It’s 8265-3412.
( )3. —____ are they? —They are XiaoLi and Jane.
( )4.. Mary ____ from Cuba.
( )5. “One one zero” 表示 ____。
( )6.. —Is he Li Ping? —Yes, ____.
1. —W____ are you from? 2. —What’s y____ name? —I’m from Shanghai. —My name is David.
3. —Are you f____ Zhengzhou? —No, we aren’t.
4. —What’s your telephone n ?—It’s (010)8659-7981.
5. —E me, are you Frank? —Yes, I am.
2. (师连续读出这11个数字，强调前10个数字用升调，最后一个用降调，并要求学生跟读，培养学生语感。)
3.(做出打电话的动作，理解telephone number的意思。)
T:What’s your telephone number?
1— W____ is he? —He i____ Xiao Ming.
2. —Is she ____ Japan? —No, she ____.
3. —W ____ are they from? —They are from C____.
4. —What’s y____ QQ number?
—____ QQ number is 158141028.
5. —____ she Jane? —____, she is.
What’s your telephone number? My telephone number is
What’s his telephone number?His telephone number is
( ) 6. How old are you?
( ) 7. Where are you from?
( ) 8. What’s your telephone number?
( ) 9. Is Miss Yang your English teacher?
( ) 10. Glad to meet you.
B.用适当的词填空。 Hello! My 1 is Kangkang. 2 am from China. This 3 my friend. 4 is his name? His name is Mike. 5 is from the U.S.A. His phone 6 is (010)6534-8719. Miss Zhao 7 my teacher. 8 is she from? She is from China, 9 . She is fine. 10 telephone number is (010)6534-8897.
1. ___________ 2. ___________ 3. ___________ 4. ___________
5. ___________ 6. ___________ 7. ___________
9. ___________ 10. ___________ 8. ___________
仁爱七年级英语教案 篇3
七年级英语（仁爱版）下册复习教案
Unit 5 Our School Life
任务形学习目标：
掌握并能熟练运用表达交通方式的句型。
掌握频度副词的表达方式。
掌握一般现在是的用法。
Topic 1 How do you usually come to school ?
二．重点短语：
1. on foot go …on foot = walk ( to )…
2. by + 交通工具 “乘坐…” by bus / bike / plane / train / subway / ship / boat / car
3.take the bus = go …by bus ride a bike = go …by bike take the subway = go …by subway
4. on weekdays 在平日5. after school 放学后after class 下课后 after breakfast / lunch / supper早餐 / 午餐 / 晚餐后 6. in their free time 在空闲时间 7. have a rest 休息一下8. read books 读书11. go swimming 去游泳 12. listen to music 听音乐 12. watch TV 看电视 13. do（one’s） homework 做作业 14. go to the zoo / park 去动物园 / 公园 15. once a week 一周一次16. every day 每天 17. have classes 上课18. for a little while 一会儿 19. go to bed 上床睡觉 20. have breakfast / lunch / supper（dinner）吃早餐 / 午餐 / 晚餐 22. at the school gate 在校门口 23. come on 快点 、加油24. get up 起床 25. talk with / to sb.与某人谈话 26. at school 在学校、在上课 27. go to school 去上学 28. and so on ……等等
三．语法：表时间频率的副词：never 从来不 seldom 极少 sometimes 有时 often 经常 usually 常常 always 总是
1. I never go to school by subway. 2. I seldom walk to school.
3. Maria sometimes takes the subway home. 4. Li Xiang often rides a bike to school.
5. We usually go to the park on foot. 6. They always go to the zoo by bus.
7. How often do you come to the library ? Very often / Twice a week / Once a week / Every day.
四. 重要句型1. Happy New Year! The same to you.
2. Your new bike looks very nice. Thank you.
3. How do you usually come to school ? By bus / car / bike. On foot.
4. It’s time for class. = It’s time to have class. 该是上课的时候了。
5. The early bird catches the worm. 笨鸟先飞。/ 捷足先登。
6. We have no more time. 我们没有更多的时间了。
7. I have four classes in the morning and two in the afternoon.我早上上四节课，下午上两节。
8. She goes to bed at about a quarter to ten. 她九点四十五分睡觉。
Topic 2 He is running on the playground.
二．重点短语：1. make cards 制作卡片 2. on the playground 在操场上 3. in the library 在图书馆
4. in the gym在体育馆 5. on the shelf在书架上（shelves 复数） 6. at the Lost and Found 在失物招领处 7.clean the room打扫房间 8.have a soccer game 举行足球比赛 9. have an English class 上英语课 10. write a letter 写信 11. some of his photos= some photos of his 他的一些照片 12. on time 准时/in time及时 14. do better in sth 在某方面做得较好 15.put on 穿、戴上、上演（代词it / them放在中间，名词中间或后面，put it / them on ） 16. show sb. around… 令某人参观……
三．语法：
现在进行时态 主语+ be（is / am / are ）+ 动词ing + 其他 。表示正在进行或发生的动作。常与now = at the moment 现在 、look看 、listen听 等连用。
1. I’m looking for my purse. 2. They aren’t sleeping at the moment.
3. Are you doing your homework ? Yes, I am. No, I’m not.
4. Is he / she singing now ? Yes, he / she is. No, he / she isn’t.
5. What is your brother doing ? He is running in the gym.
四. 重要句型
1.Excuse me, may I borrow your story book ? Of course. = Sure. (borrow sth from…从……借回某物……)
2. How Long may I keep the book ? Two weeks. ( keep 借用，后面常跟一段时间连用)
3.You must return them on time. （ return 归还，return sth to …把……归还给……）
4. Thank you. It’s a pleasure. = A pleasure = My pleasure. 别客气。
5. Sorry, I don’t have any. Thank you all the same. 仍然感谢你。
6. See you soon. 回头见. 7. What else ? 还有别的什么？（ else 其他的、别的，常放在疑问词what/ where / who…和不定代词something/ somebody等的后面）
Topic 3 My school life is very interesting.
重点短语：1. outdoor activity 课外活动 2. easy and interesting 容易又有趣3. difficult and boring 又难又乏味 4. be friendly to sb. =be kind to sb. 对某人友好 5.between…and… 在……之间… 6. learn…from… 向……学习……/ 从…中学…… 7. from…to… 从……到…… 8. in the morning / afternoon / evening 在早上/ 下午/ 晚上9.on Monday 在星期一 on Monday morning在星期一的早上 11. tell sb. about sth告诉某人关于某事
三．语法：
一般现在时 主语+ 动词原形/ 动词第三人称单数s/es + 其他。表示经常或习惯性的动作。常与频率副词：never 从来不 seldom 极少 sometimes 有时 often 经常 usually 常常 always 总是或every day 每天、in the morning / afternoon / evening 在早上/ 下午/ 晚上 等连用。例如:
I often do my homework in the evening. I don’t often go shopping on Sunday.
Do you usually come to school by car? Yes, I do. No, I don’t.
Sometimes she watches TV in the evening. She doesn’t like Chinese.
Does she often take a bus to school ? Yes, she does. No, she doesn’t.
四. 重要句型
1.What day is it today？It’s Sunday / Monday / Tuesday / Wednesday / Thursday / Friday / Saturday.(在英语国家每周的第一天是星期天而不是星期一)
2. What class are they having ? They are having a music class.
3. What time does the class begin ? At ten o’clock.
4. What do you think of math? = How do you like math ? 你认为数学怎么样？ It’s difficult and boring.
5. Why (为什么)do you like English ? Because（因为）it’s easy and interesting.
7.What subject (学科)do you like best ? I like history best.
8. At school, my teachers and classmates are very friendly to me.
9. I study Chinese, English, politics, geography and some other subjects.（other泛指其他的，别的+ 名词复数）
10.English is my favorite (最喜欢的)subject. I also like P.E and music.= I like P.E and music , too. (也)
11.Can you tell me something about it ?
五．词语辨析
a few 几个，一些 + 名词复数 a little 一点儿 +不可数名词 many 许多+名词复数 few几乎没有 little 几乎没有 much许多、大量的+不可数名词
other泛指其他的，别的+ 名词复数 another 泛指又一个、再一个、另一个+ 名词单数 the other 两者中的另一个
Unit 6 Our Local Area
Topic1 Is there a sofa in your study?
一、学习目标
1、掌握单词和重点词组
2、掌握there be的各种形式及用法
3、能熟练用英语描写房间、家庭、学校等建筑
4、熟练掌握方位介词in, on, behind, under, near, next to, in front of
二、重点词组
On the first floor 美式英语一楼floor地板，此处指“楼房的层”。英式英语用the ground floor 表示一楼
Why not =Why don’t you 复习其他提建议的方式
Go upstairs上楼 Go downstairs 下楼
A moment later 一会以后
You have a nice study。 study名词：书房 动词：学习与learn的区别
In the front of the house 在屋子（里面的）前面 In front of the house在屋子（外面的）前面
Talk about谈论 talk with sb.和某人谈论
Put them away 把他们收拾好
Look after = take care of 照顾，看管
In the tree（非树本身的东西）在树上 On the tree(树本身的东西)
On the river浮在水面上 over the river 在河上（悬空）
On the wall在墙上 in the wall 在墙里
Get a letter from sb= hear from sb 注意hear from宾语是人不是信，her of听说某人(物)，hear听到，听见，侧重听的结果。常用 hear sb doing sth/do sth
Tell sb about sth Tell sb to do sth Tell sb sth
want sb to do sth/want to do sth
三、语法知识： There be 句型的用法
There be句型是英语中常见的特殊句型，用以表示某物某事存在或不存在。句中的there只起引导作用，并无实际意义，句子的真正主语是谓语动词be后面的名词。
1、在there be 句型中,谓语动词be要与主语（某人或某物）的数保持一致。当主语是两个或两个以上的名词时，谓语动词要与跟它最近的那个名词一致。
eg. ① There is a bird in the tree.
② There is a teacher and many students in our classroom.
③ There are two boys and a girl under the tree.
2、There be句型与have的区别：
There be 句型和have都表示“有”的含义。区别如下：There be表示“某处存在某物或某人”；have表示“某人拥有某物/某人”，它表示所有、拥有关系。 eg.①He has two sons.
②There are two men in the office.
当have表示“包括”、“存在”的含义时，There be 句型与其可互换。
eg. A week has seven days. =There are seven days in a week.
3、否定句
There be句型的否定式的构成和含有be动词的其它句型一样，在be后加上not或no即可。注意not和no的不同：not是副词，no为形容词，not a/an/any + n. 相当于no+ n.。例如：
There are some pictures on the wall. →There aren't any pictures on the wall. =There are no pictures on the wall.
There is a bike behind the tree. → There isn't a bike behind the tree. =There is no bike behind the tree.
4、特殊疑问句
There be句型的特殊疑问句形式有以下三种变化：
① 对主语提问：当主语是人时，用\“Who\'s+介词短语?\”；当主语是物时，用\“What\'s + 介词短语?\”。注意：无论原句的主语是单数还是复数，对之提问时一般都用be的单数形式(回答时却要根据实际情况来决定)。如：
There are many things over there. →What's over there?
There is a little girl in the room.→Who is in the room?
② 对地点状语提问：提问地点当然用“Where is / are+主语?\”啦！例如：
There is a computer on the desk. → Where is the computer?
There are four children on the playground. →Where are the four children?
③ 对数量提问：一般有两种句型结构：
How many+复数名词+are there+介词短语？
How much+不可数名词+is there+介词短语？
used to表示过去常常做某事.
例句: I used to play football after school.过去我常常在放学后踢球.
be used to do的意思是被用来做某事;be used to doing的意思是习惯于做某事.
used to + do：“过去常常”表示过去习惯性的动作或状态，但如今已不存在。
Mother used not to be so forgetful.
Scarf used to take a walk. (过去常常散步)
be used to + doing： 对……已感到习惯，或“习惯于”，to是介词，后需加名词或动名词。
He is used to a vegetarian diet.
Scarf is used to taking a walk.(现在习惯于散步)
Topic 2 What’s your home like?
重点语法：There be 句型
There be句型的否定句
There be句型的疑问句
③ There be句型的就近原则
④ There be句型的反意疑问句
⑤There be句型与have/has的区分
重点短语：
be like / an apartment building/ a town house /in the surburbs/
on the street corner/ rent a house with furniture to others / keep money
重点句型 ：
①What’s your home like?
②What’s the matter ……?
③I hear you playing the piano.
④I can’t hear you ,the line is bad.
⑤I’ll get someone to check it right now .
⑥The traffic is heavy and the cost of living is high.
⑦There are many old people and many families with young children living there .
点拨：
㈠What’s your home like?
Like 动词“喜欢”，介词“像”。be like像和look like看起来像。be like 主要用来询问人的性格、外貌和事物特征。Look like 主要用来询问外貌。
㈡for rent 出租。wanted求租.rent sth to sb把某物租给某人rent sth from sb 从某人处租某物。
㈢call sb at ＋ 号码。请打......电话与某人联系。
㈣I hear you playing the piano.
hear sb doing sth听见某人正在做某事（强调动作进行）
hear sb do sth (强调全过程)
㈤Many shops and restaurants are close to my home .
be close to 离……近。close 与near 都有“靠近”的意思，但close 比near 更近。
Topic 3 Which is the way to the post office?
重点语法：
祈使句
①肯定、否定形式。
②特例。
重点短语：
a ticket for speeding 超速罚单 at the end of the road在路的尽头 go across走过 turn left/right向左转/向右转 on the corner of 在。。。转角/拐弯处 across from 在。。。对面 between……and 在。。。之间 take the No. 718 bus乘坐718路公共汽车 change to变成no parking禁止停车 get hurt受伤 obey the traffic rules 遵守交通规则 keep on the right of the road 保持在路的右边 at the foot of 在。。。的脚下 hold sth in one’s hand抓住某人的手
重点句型：
一．问路语
Where is ……?
Is there a……near here?
Which is the way to ……?
How can I get to……?
Could you tell me the way to……?
二．指路
①Go along/down this road until……
②Turn left at the first turning﹦Take the first turning on the left.
③Go straight ahead and you will see……
④It’s about 15 kilometres away from here.
三．Thank you all the same .﹦Thanks anyway.
四．You can’t miss it.
五．You need to take bus No.718……
六．How far is it from here?
七．Everybody must be careful and obey the traffic.
八．We must stop and look both ways before we cross the road.
语法讲解：
祈使句：表示请求、命令、禁止、劝告或建议的句子，特点是省略了主语。
祈使句无主语, 主语you常省去;
动词原形谓语当, 句首加don't否定变;
朗读应当用降调, 句末常标感叹号。
●肯定结构:
1. Do型(即:动词原形(+宾语)+其它成分)。如:Please have a seat here. 请这边坐。
有的祈使句在意思明确的情况下,动词可省略。如:This way, please. = Go this way, please. 请这边走。
2. Be型(即:Be + 表语(名词或形容词)+其它成分)。如:Be a good boy! 要做一个好孩子!
3. Let型(即:Let + 宾语 + 动词原形 + 其它成分)。如:Let me help you. 让我来帮你。
●否定结构:
1. Do型和Be型的否定式都是在句首加don't构成。如:Don't forget me! 不要忘记我!
Don't be late for school! 上学不要迟到!
2. Let型的否定式有两种:“Don't + let + 宾语 + 动词原形 + 其它成分”和“Let + 宾语 + not + 动词原形 + 其它成分”。如:Don't let him go. / Let him not go. 别让他走。
3. 有些可用no开头,用来表示禁止性的祈使句。如:No smoking! 禁止吸烟!No fishing! 禁止钓鱼!
Unit 7 The Birthday Party
Topic1 When were you born ?
任务型学习目标：掌握序数词的表达法
掌握系动词be的一般过去时的用法
掌握日期的读法和写法
重点词组：
Plan to do sth have a birthday party be born be like
use sth to do sth must be buy sb sth=buy sth for sb
重点句型
When were you born? I was born in June,1970
Were you born in He bei? Yes,I was, No,I wasn’t.
3. Where was she born? She was born in /Henan.
4. When was your daughter born? She was born on october 22 .
5. What’s the date today? It’s may 8.
6. What’s the shape of your present? It’s round.
7. What shape is it? It’s rectangle.
8. How long/wide/tall/high/deep+is it?
9. What do we use it for? We use it to study English.
10.It must be an English learning machine.
11.Here is a present for you.
重点语法：系动词be的一般过去时
1. I was born in June,1970. 2. I was not born in He bei.
3. Were you born in Hebei? Yes,I was, No,Iwasn’t.
When was you daughter born? She was born on October 22nd,1996.
Where were you born? I was born in Hebei.
Was it like a flower just now? Yes,it was, No,it wasn’t.
重要知识点：
时间介词in/on/at用法
介词in/on/at可以用于表示时间的名词前，有“在”的意思，用法如下：
1）at用于钟点时刻前，意思为“在--- 时（刻）”，如at three O’clock
at a quarter to six at noon at night
at midnight at this time of day
2)in 用于泛指一天的上午，下午，晚上等，也用于某个较长的时间，如年，月，季节等，如in the morning/afternoon/evening in , in the day/daytime.
In还可以表示“从现在起一段时间以后”in a week
3）on用于表示在具体的某一天以及某天的某段时间，如on Sunday
on Children’s day , on the night of new year,on the morning\afternoon\ evening of , on Sunday morning
中考链结：
（ ）1.My uncle was born____June,1960.
A in B on C at D for
（ ）2.(08河南)We will never forget what happened___the afternoon of May 12. A in B by C at D on
（ ）3. (08苏州)Chinese climbers carried the Olympic Flame(奥运圣火)to the top of the world’s highest mountain___8th May,2008
A on B at C in D from
（ ）4.Mike will go to the town____December28
Unit7 Top2复习教案
知识网络梳理
1．重点词组：at the birthday party在生日聚会上 perform ballet跳芭蕾舞 dance to disco 跳迪斯科 take these flowers to 把这些花带去。。。 work out math problems 解出数学题 read books 读书fly a klite放风筝 be good at / do well in doing擅长做。。。 have a good time /enjoy oneself玩得开心with one’s help / with the help of 在某人的帮助下
2.重点句型:
Can you dance ?
Yes,I can /Yes ,a little /Yes,very well
No,Ican’t /No,not at all。
She can fly kites very well now. But one year ago , she couldn’t do it at all
Kangkang is good at playing soccer ,while Michael does well in basketball
Six years ago,there was something wrong with her eyes
With her mother’s help ,Jenny could write many words
3．易混点点拨：
1>play the guilar（piano /violin……）
Play football （soccer /basket……）
Play with the basketball （football /soccer…… ）
球类运动前不用 the ，乐器名称前用 the
2>Take ，bring ，fetch 和 carry
Bring“带来，拿来”表示 “拿到靠近说话着的地方”；take “拿走，带走”表示“拿到远离说话着的地方”：carry“拉，搬”表示“用力移动，没有方向”；fetch“去取，去拿”，表示“往返拿物”。
Please take the books to the classroom。
Remember to your homework to school tomorrow
The bag is too heavy，please it to my office。
Don’t worry ,I can the key.
3>Read, see ,look and watch
See 看见，表结果；look看，表动作，不及物动词，后面需加介词at才能跟宾语；watch看比赛、电视；read看书、报，表示阅读
I can an apple on the table
I want to the film with you
，there is a kite flying in the sky
Please the blackboard carefully
Tv too much is bad for your health
He’s on tonight
4>work和job work可以作动词work out / at / on / for / as计算出/在……方面工作/致力于/为……而工作/作为……而工作，It doesn’t work .The pills that the doctor gave me aren’t working.可以作不可数名词:工作at work / out o
仁爱七年级英语教案 篇4
2、学会询问他人姓名及介绍他人姓名.
3、能听懂有关谈论他人姓名的对话并进行自由交际.
1.个人自渎，记忆本课单词.
2.小组互相检查单词读写情况.
3.根据汉语写出下列英语单词并展示.
学习任务二: 运用句型：What's his / her name?
His / Her name is .... 进行自由交际.
1.小组合作，理解并熟读下列短语，并写出汉语意思.
2.个人理解下列对话，并且两人合作练习.
A：Hello! What's your name?
B：Nice to meet you,too.
3.小组合作，练习自己的对话.
4. 对抗组开展竞赛，展示自己的对话.
1.个人看图，理解四幅图画，思考图画中人是在谈论他人还是对方.
2.听听力，给四幅图画编号.
3. 小组为单位，熟读2b中的名字。
4.听听力，完成2b.
二、合作共建(教师寄语：Many hands make light work. )
讨论下面两句话如何用英语表达.
1.他叫Bob.
2.她叫Jenny.
三、系统总结(教师寄语：No man can do two things at once.)
根据提示，完成下列问答.
What's _______ name? _______ is ....
1、 写出下列短语.
2、 根据句意及首字母补全单词。
(1)_________ is your name ?
(2)Nice to m________you.
(3)His a _________is good.
(4)L______! His clock is beautiful(漂亮的) .
1. _______, What's his name? His name is John Green.
2. She is a girl(女孩).What's ______ name?
五、【课后反思】(教师寄语：Never do things by halves)
第3课时 Unit 1 My name 's Gina (总第3课时)
2、正确辨别英文名字的姓和名，以及和中文名字的差异.
3、 学会询问他人名和姓的句型.
【学习过程】：
1、 个人自读，记忆本课单词.
2、小组相互检查 单词读和写的情况.
3,、据汉语写出单词,小组竞赛并展示.
学习任务二: 能运用句型:What's your first name ?
My first name is....
What's your last name?
My last name is...进行交际.
1、试读下列姓名,尝试总结归纳.
First name :________ Last name: ________
2、理解下列对话,两人合作练习.
A: Hello! What's your name?
B: My name is Jack Smith.
A: What's your first name ?
B: My first name is....
A: What's your last name?
3、小组合作,练习自己的对话.
二、合作共建(教师寄语：Many hands make light work. )
学会了询问他人的名和姓的句型后，能否用his/her做替换练习。
三、系统总结(教师寄语：No man can do two things at once.)
1、 总结你所知道的名和姓。
2、自己编写一个询问他人姓和名的小对话.
四、诊断评价 (一) 用所给词的适当形式填空.
1. Nice to meet ______(your).
2. _____(she) name is Helen Black.
3. His family name _____(be) Mr Green.
4. ______(be) you Mr Green.
5. Hi, I _____(be) Lily.
1. Brown 是他的姓氏. Brown is ______________name.
2. 她的名是什么? ____________________name?
3. 你好,我是杰克. Hi, ________Jack.
4. 我的钢笔是黑色的. _____pen is ______.
5. 他的名字是吉姆. _______________Jim.
(三)根据上下文完成对话.
A: I'm Gina,________________?
B: My name is Linda Brown.
A: Is Linda your last name?
B: No.Linda is my __________. And Brown is ___________.
B: ____________________.
五、【课后反思】(教师寄语：Never do things by halves)
仁爱七年级英语教案 篇5
前言
《教学案例设计》一书是在仔细研究《Project English》学生用书、教师用书、《英语课程标准》的基础上编写的。以学生，教师和教学的实际为出发点，解读教学目标，创设教学情境，提供教学素材，节省老师备课时间，易于操作。其活动设计注重交际，符合学生认知规律。案例的课堂资源丰富多彩，形式多样，可以满足不同地区的实际需要。
● 整体特色
本书严格按照《Project English》学生用书的流程编写，一课一例。每节课设计为45分钟，可根据实际适当调整。我们以行之有效的五指教学方案为编写模式。其中台词用英语；场景、活动说明、补充材料、文化意识、注意事项等放在括号内用汉语表达。五指教学方案分为五步，标注时间建议。
Step 1 Review 第一步 复习（时间：-分钟）
导入本课新词句。可以用课本上的图片、教具、chant、歌曲、游戏、直观表演等复习导入本课新词句，既活跃课堂气氛，引起学生兴趣，又体现建构主义理论，学生的经验是学习的重要基础。激活学生先前的知识和经验，为进一步探究找好最近发展区打基础，引出本课新词句。
Step 2 Presentation 第二步 呈现 （时间：-分钟）
呈现对话或短文等本section重点活动的情景。找出关键词句，目标语言，为交际积累材料。理顺思路，为下一步在用中学打基础。下面步骤中的交际不只是死记硬背，而是灵活运用，在用中学。
Step 3 Consolidation第三步 巩固 （时间：-分钟）
语音、语调练习。看第二步中找出的关键词，不看课本，模仿原文对话。所有学生分组互相检查。
Step 4 Practice 第四步 练习（时间：-分钟）
呈现书上其他活动，在不同情景中练习目标语言，展开任务型活动。在用中巩固和学会使用目标语言。
Step 5 Project 第五步 综合探究活动 （时间：-分钟）
让学生用本课所学词句展开活动，锻炼学生语言综合运用能力和探究能力，体现学了就用的原则。有活动产品。对学生提出的要求非常具体。
● 编写特点
本书各单元列出了教学目标。各案例以section为编写单位。每个section包含如下内容：
首先指出了各section的重点活动，即本课呈现的重点内容。然后是
一、教学目标：用英语分类呈现本section教学目标。
二、教具：考虑不同地区实际情况，可以有多种选择。
三、五指教学方案
另外， 我们在编写的过程中，为了操作方便，统一了格式，现说明如下：
S-Student,
Ss-Students
T -Teacher
S1-Student 1
S2-Student 2
最后，我们诚挚地感谢长期以来大力支持我们的广大师生们。本书是设计者和撰稿人的精心奉献，意在给您提供一份建议。希望能够抛砖引玉，激发您的灵感。但是由于水平有限，加之时间仓促，疏漏与错误也是在所难免的。我们期待着您的关心，也期待着您的批评和指正。
北京市仁爱教育研究所
Unit 5
教学目标
语
言
知
识 类别 内 容 课次 要求
语音 // // /t/ /d/ /ts/ /dz/ /tr/ /dr/ /l/ /m/ /n/ //
词
汇 wake，early, first，day, term，must, still, by，on foot, the same to, usually, always，Ms., boat，ship，sea，train，by plane/air/airplane 1A 掌
握
weekday，around，bird，catch，walk，never，sometimes，ride，park, game, late, weekend 1B
guest，life，almost，bicycle，break, finish，spare，basketball，football，read,story，clean, dance，piano，library, once，twice, week, listen，music, write，supermarket 1C
pleasure，volleyball，while 1D
playground，lab，room，gym，classroom，building，pool，thing, card，motorcycle，road， physics 2A
most, better, minute, shelf, great, dear, borrow, course, keep, return, post, newspaper, purse, money，anything，else, nothing, meal, umbrella 2B
plan, next to, near, upstairs, news, attention, between, movie, show, hall, program, gone, wind, activity, stamp, world 2C
traffic, child, exercise，Japanese，the Great wall, wonderful 2D
Wednesday，end, period，Monday，Tuesday，Thursday，Friday，history, art, math, noon, geography, P.E, meeting, how many, lesson, subject, draw, learn 3A
question，Australia，easy，interesting，difficult，boring 3B
answer, joke，funny，interest，everyday,science，useful，hard,wish 3C
wash, restaurant 3D
subway 1A 理
解
worm 1B
reporter，Net Bar, roller skating 1C
measure 1D
dining hall，dormitory 2A
bookstore，workbook，project, certainly, lost and found 2B
poster, collection 2C
partner, happily 2D
timetable, biology, politics, outdoor 3A
editor, column, writer 3C
novel 3D
语
言
知
识 类别 内 容
语
法 1. 一般现在时（Simple present）
2. 频度副词（Adverbs of frequency）
never，seldom，sometimes，often，usually，always，once，twice
3. 现在进行时（Present continuous）
I’m looking for a book.
Are you doing your homework? Yes， I am./No， I’m not.
Is he/she...? Yes， he/she is./No， he/she isn’t.
What are you doing now? I’m playing computer games.
What is he/she doing? He/She is...
功能和话题 1. 论交通方式（Talking about means of transport）
How do you usually go to school? I usually go to school by bike.
2. 采访（Interviews）
Our guest today is Michael from Class 2， Grade 1.
3. 谈论日常生活（Talking about routines）
4. 学校建筑（School buildings）
swimming pool， playground， library， dormitory， lab， canteen， gym
5. 谈论兴趣喜好（Talking about interests， likes and dislikes）
I like the swimming pool best. Why do you like English? Because it’s interesting and
easy.
6. 借物（Borrowing things）
How long can I keep it? Two weeks.
7. 新闻（News）、海报（Poster）
Attention， please! Here is the news.
8. 谈论学校活动、科目和时间表（Talking about school activities， subjects and timetable）
9. 谈论学校生活（Talking about school life）
Topic 1
Section A
The main activities are 1 and 3a. 本课重点活动是1 and 3a。
Ⅰ.Teaching aims and demands 教学目标
1. （1）Talk about means of transport:
on foot， by bus， by car， by bike， by plane/air/airplane, by train， by subway， by boat/ship/sea
（2）Learn adverbs of frequency:
usually， always
2. Learn the simple present tense:
How do you usually go to school?
I usually go to school by bike.
3.Talk about how to go to school:
Do you often come to school by bike?
Yes, I do.
How do you usually come to school?
I usually come to school by subway.
I always come to school by bus.
Ⅱ.Teaching aids 教具
关于交通工具的玩具/教学图片/简笔画/课件（任老师挑选）
Ⅲ.Five瞗inger Teaching Plan 五指教学方案
Step 1 Review第一步 复习（时间：10分钟）
1.（师生互动复习旧问候语。）
T： Good morning， class.
Ss：Good morning， Miss...／Mr. ...
T： Welcome back to school， boys and girls. I’m very glad to see you again.
Ss：Me， too.
（找一学生协助呈现新问候语“新年好”的答语。）
T： Happy New Year! 新年好！
S： The same to you! 新年好！
（板书如下：）
Happy New Year! 新年好！
The same to you! 新年好！
（全班分两大组，先按左右分组，然后男女分组互相用上面的对话打招呼。）
T： Boys and girls. Happy New Year!
Ss： The same to you!
Group A: Happy New Year!
Group B: The Same to you!
Boys： Happy New Year， girls!
Girls： The same to you!
（重新分两大组。）
Group A： Happy New Year!
Group B： The same to you!
2.（复习上学期的时间表达法，导入本课重点:交通工具的使用。）
T： What time is it? What’s the time?
Oh， it’s seven o’clock. It’s time to go to school.
I usually go to school by bike／bus／subway...
（板书所有的交通工具的名词，把玩具拿出来或把教学图片挂在黑板上，或用简笔画画出几种交通工具来。）
by bus by car on foot
by bike by boat by plane/air/airplane
其它的：by train／subway／underground／ship
I usually go to school by bike／bus／car.
（从而引出本课重点句型，并板书在黑板上。）
A：How do you usually go to school?
B：I usually go to school on foot.
（过渡到下一步。）
Step 2 Presentation第二步 呈现（时间：5分钟）
1. (教师指导两人一组表演，复习原来对话，从而引出对话1。)
A: What time do you wake up?
B: I wake up at six.
A: How do you usually go to school?
B: By bike.
T: Do you know what time Kangkang gets up? Let’s learn 1.
2.（设置并板书听力任务，让学生带着任务听录音。）
What’s the time?
Is it time to get up?
Who wakes Kangkang up?
How does Kangkang go to school today?
（听录音，回答问题。）
T：Listen to the tape and answer the questions.
wake up--6∶50--get up--early--first day--by bike
（将关键词写在黑板上，呈现出1。）
Step 3 Consolidation第三步 巩固（时间：5分钟）
1.（老师放录音1，示范让学生跟读，用铅笔标重读与语调。）
T：Follow the tape and draw “up and down” with your pencil like this.
2.（老师让学生擦去所标重读与语调，先自读，然后跟录音一起读，逐句核对语音语调。）
T：Rub them clean and read and check your pronunciation sentence by sentence.Go!
3.（人机对话，即学生和录音机对话。）
T: You are mother， listen to Kangkang and make a dialog with him.
4.（看第二步呈现在黑板上的关键词，学生两人一组表演，不能看书，只能看关键词对话。）
T: Work in pairs. Close your book， look at the blackboard and act the dialog out.
Step 4 Practice第四步 练习（时间：15分钟）
1.（用图片或多媒体课件教交通工具，学生学习2。）
(方案a。)
T: Look at the pictures. Say the phrases.
（老师指导学生说。）
S: on foot/by bus/by car/by bike/by plane...
T: What time is it? It’s six o’clock. It’s time to wake up.
（然后两人一组练习下表方框内容和巩固新句型：一人做使用交通工具的动作，另一人猜并看黑板造句。然后交换角色。这样做可以鼓励学生进行合作学习，人人课堂机会均等，提高课堂效率。完成2。）
by bike by bus by plane on foot
Kangkang
Maria
Michael
Jane
A：Today is the first day of the new term.
B：Kangkang usually goes to school by bike.
A：Today is...
B：Maria...
(方案b。)
（利用多媒体课件，让学生听声音，猜交通工具。）
T: Listen to the sounds， please guess.
Ss: ...
T: OK! Look at the pictures in 2， read and match.
2.（让学生完成3a。）
T: Jane meets Kangkang and Sally. Listen and answer， how do Kangkang and Sally come to
school?
（让学生回答问题并看关键词分角色对话。板书如下。）
Kangkang-by bike Sally-by subway Jane-by bus
3.（让学生听，做4。）
T: Listen to the tape and match.
4.（两人一组表演对话。）
T: Work in pairs. Talk about how to go to school with your partner.
Step 5 Project第五步 综合探究活动（时间：10分钟）
1.（老师再次引用多媒体课件，这次只放flash动画，让学生自己展开想像的翅膀，任意造
句子，要用上交通工具的名词。）
T: Let’s look at the pictures. Are you interested in these lovely pictures? Yes， I know you do.
Please make some sentences as you like， and don’t forget to use these means of transport.
Are you ready? Go!
2.（做5。首先，让学生分四人组做一个调查报告How do you usually go to school?完成5。
然后全班集体调查，让几人问How many friends come to school on foot?／...每人问一种交通工具，每个学生按人数从多到少列成表格，最后随便抽向大家汇报。）
T: Please report your answer to your classmates.
S1: In our class， fifteen students go to school by bike.
S2: In our class， twenty students go to school by bus.
S3: ...
3.（弹性课堂，让学生互相猜测对方上学所使用的交通工具。）
T: Let’s guess. How does your partner go to school? Write it down and then report your answer
to your classmates. Who wants to say first?
S1: Li Ming usually goes to school by bike. I am right.
S2: I am wrong. Liu Li usually goes to school by bike. I guess she goes to school on foot.
4. Homework：
(1)（到社会上做调查，看有多少人使用何种交通工具，从多到少一一列表出来。）
(2) Write a passage: My Morning (不少于5个句子。)
(3) Preview Section B. Write down adverbs of frequency.
Section B
The main activities are 1,2 and 3a.本课重点活动是1,2和3a。
Ⅰ.Teaching aims and demands教学目标
1. Learn how to use adverbs of frequency:
never， sometimes
2. Learn the simple present tense:
I always get up at around six o’clock.
I often go to school by bike.
3. Talk about frequency:
（1）How does Maria go home?
She sometimes goes home by subway.
（2）I seldom walk to school.
I never go to school on foot.
Ⅱ. Teaching aids 教具
录音机/挂图/单词卡片／调查表
Ⅲ. Five瞗inger Teaching Plan 五指教学方案
Step 1 Review第一步 复习（时间：10分钟）
1. Words competition.
（1）A require answer.(必答题。)
T: Boys and girls. Let’s have words competition as usual. First require answer. Each student
two words. I’ll give you Chinese meaning， please say them in English. Row 1， begin!
boat， ship， sea， train， plane， air， usually， always， first，
term， early， wake， on foot， by plane， the same to， by subway
（2）A quick response.(抢答题。)
T：Good! Go on our quick response. If you know, you can stand up quickly. OK? Begin!
sometimes， never， seldom， weekday， around， bird， catch， walk， ride， park
（3）T：Well done， please read them together.
2.（利用头脑风暴法，在1分钟内，每组每位同学依次说出一种乘坐的交通工具，看哪组
同学说的最多，就获胜。）
T: Now I ‘ll give you one minute. Each of you says one kind of transportation. The group that
has the most will win.
3.（利用链条式发问即每竖排同学一个问，一个回答，接着转身问后面的同学，给每组2
分钟，看哪组在规定的时间说的最多，就获胜，问题是：How do you usually go to school?）
Example:
S1: How do you usually go to school?
S2: I usually go to school by bike. How do you usually go to school?
S3: I usually go to school by bus. How do you usually go to school?
S4: ...
4.（老师根据第3个环节的实际情况，导出1部分的语言功能目标，为下一步过渡做铺垫。）
T: Yeah. Now I know some of you go to school by bike, some of you go to school by bus. But
you know I always get up at around six o’clock. I often go to school on foot. But
sometimes I go to school by bike. I never go to school by bus.
Step 2 Presentation第二步 呈现（时间：5分钟）
（设置听力任务，让学生带着任务听录音，可以降低难度。）
T: Listen to the tape of 1 and find out some key words.
（再听一遍，找出关键词，为下一步的巩固做铺垫。）
around， weekday， bird， catch， worm， seldom， walk， never
（板书并英汉对照。）
Step 3 Consolidation第三步 巩固（时间：10分钟）
1.（1）（老师放录音1，示范让学生跟读，用铅笔标重读与语调。）
T: Follow the tape and draw “up or down” with your pencil like this.
（2）（老师让学生擦去所标重读与语调，先自读，然后跟录音一起读，逐句核对语音语调，
这样做可以使学生集中注意力，效率更高。）
T: Rub them clean and now read and check your pronunciation sentence by sentence. Go!
（3）（人机对话，即学生和录音机对话。这样能提高学生兴趣。）
T: You are Michael. Listen to Kangkang and make a dialog with Kangkang.
（4）（看第二步，呈现黑板上的关键词，学生两人一问一答，只看黑板上关键词对话。）
T: Work in pairs， close your book. Look at the blackboard and act the dialog out.
（5）（利用关键词进行造句。）
Example:
Seldom: I seldom go to school on foot.
...
2.（呈现2的图片，要求学生根据图片的意思，给每个频度副词造句。）
T: Look at the table， please make sentences by using these adverbs of frequency.
Step 4 Practice第四步 练习（时间：10分钟）
1.（呈现3a的图片，通过师生互动，进一步让学生了解和巩固语言知识。）
（1）T: Look at the first picture. What does Maria do?
S: Maria goes home by subway.
（通过谈论第2、3、4幅图，可以得到以下几个句子。）
Example:
Li Xiang goes to school by bike.
We go to the park on foot.
They go to the zoo by bus.
（2）（听录音，要求学生写句子。）
T: Listen to the tape and write down on the notebook.
Example:
Maria sometimes goes home by subway.
Li Xiang often goes to school by bike.
We usually go to the park on foot.
They always go to the zoo by bus.
（3）（核对答案。）
T: Now let’s check the answers together.
（4）（根据以上句子，进行回答。）
T: Then please ask and answer. You can do it like this:
A: How does Maria go home?
B: Maria sometimes goes home by subway. Are you clear? Begin!
（5）（呈现句子的同义替换，加深对乘坐交通工具方法的灵活运用。）
T: Look at this sentence again. Maria sometimes goes home by subway.
We also say: Maria sometimes takes the subway home.
But what about...
Ask students to do exercises and check the answers.
Keys to answers:
Li Xiang often rides a bike to school.
We usually walk to the park.
They always take the bus to the zoo.
（6）（总结归纳乘坐交通工具的用法。）
Example:
by bike:ride a bike by plane:fly to...
by bus:take a bus on foot:walk to...
by car: take a car by subway:take the subway
Step 5 Project第五步 综合探究活动（时间：10分钟）
1. Finish 4.
T:Make a survey of your partners and fill in the chart. Then report it to your class.
get up walk to school watch TV in
the evening do your
homework play computer
game shelp your
parents
always
usually
often
sometimes
seldom
never
A: Do you often watch TV in the evening?
B: No，I don’t. I sometimes watch TV. Sometimes I read books.
2.（呈现调查表，根据表格内容，写一段话，然后汇报。）
go shopping watch TV walk after supper get up early
I
Grandma
Grandpa
Father
Mother
T: Look at the table， please make a survey. You can fill in the blanks with the adverbs of
frequency. For example: seldom， always， sometimes， often...
3.（弹性课堂，要求学生背一句谚语。板书。）
Proverb.
Where there is will， there is a way.
4. Let’s chant 5.
T: At last let’s relax. Let’s chant together.
（在轻松活泼融洽的气氛中结束这节课。）
You go to work by bike.
He walks to school with Mike.
She comes here by plane.
They go there by train.
We are busy on weekdays.
Let’s be early as always.
5. Homework:
(1)（让学生写一篇有关自己的小短文，用上Section A和 Section B中学过的重点句型。
五句话左右。有兴趣，学生们可以课外收集中外古谚语，名人名言。培养他们的自主学习能力和自我构建能力。）
（2）（让学生收集有关中美学生学习生活的资料，看他们之间有什么不同，预习1a on page
5。）
SectionC
The main activities are 1a， 2 and 3.本课重点活动是1a， 2和3。
Ⅰ.Teaching aims and demands教学目标
1.（1）Learn adverbs of frequency:
once， twice
（2）Learn other useful words and expressions:
guest， life， almost, bicycle, break, finish， spare， basketball， football，read, story，
clean， dance， piano， library, week, listen， music, write, supermarket
2.（1）Learn the simple present tense:
I usually play computer games.
He usually reads story books.
Do you often read books in the library?
（2）-How often do you go to the library?
-Once/Twice/Three times a week/Very often/Every day/Seldom...
3. Talk about the school activities:
play computer games， read story books， clean the house， play soccer， go dancing， play
basketball， play the piano， sing songs
Ⅱ.Teaching aids教具
话筒/图片/录音机
Ⅲ. Five-finger Teaching Plan五指教学方案
Step 1 Review第一步 复习（时间：10分钟）
1.（复习Section B 5 Let’s chant，活跃课堂气氛。）
T: The whole class， let’s chant again.
（全班同学边唱边用双手打节拍。）
2.（复习上节课的交通工具。）
T: How do you usually go to school?
S1: I usually go to school on foot.
T: How do you usually go to school?
S2: I usually go to school by bike.
T: ...
3.（学生在小组里进行链式对话，继续复习交通工具。）
S1: How do you often go to school?
S2: I often go to school on foot. What about you?
S3: I often go to school by bike. How do you usually go to school?
S4: ...
4. (教师引导学生复习频度副词seldom, often, always,从而引出本节课的新词组how often和另几个频度副词once, twice...)
T: I always go to library after school.
Mr. Zhang doesn’t go to library every day, he goes there once a week.
(板书划线部分，学习新词once,用同样的方法讲解twice。)
T：How often do you go to library?(学习how often)
S：...
(板书划线部分，重点讲解how often的用法。)
T: Now, let’s use them to make dialogs.(指着黑板上的新词。)
5.（邀请一位同学扮演贵宾，老师扮演采访者进行采访，尽可能帮助学生。）
T: Now， I am an interviewer. Good morning， everyone! Our guest today is
Kangkang from Class 5， Grade 1. Hello， Kangkang!
Kangkang: Hello.
T: We want to know something about your school life. How do you usually get to
school?
Kangkang: I usually walk to school. But sometimes I go to school by bike.
T: Where do you have lunch?
Kangkang: I usually have lunch at school.
T: Do you sometimes eat out in school days?
Kangkang: No， I don’t.
T: Do you have a short break after lunch?
Kangkang: Yes， I do./No， I don’t.
T: What time do the classes finish in the afternoon?
Kangkang: At about half past four.
T: What do you often do in your spare time?
Kangkang: I often play basketball.
（老师板书新单词、短语。）
interviewer， guest， school life， eat out， have a short sleep, finish, in your spare time,
basketball
6.（让学生扮演采访者，向Kangkang提问题。）
T: Now， the other students. Do you have any other questions? You can ask Kangkang.
S1: What time do you usually get to school?
Kangkang: I usually get to school at about seven o’clock.
S2: What time do the classes begin in the morning?
Kangkang: At about twenty to eight.
S3: How many lessons do you have every day?
Kangkang: I have 7 lessons every day.
S4: ...
7.（采访结束。）
T: OK. The interview is over. Thank you, Kangkang. Now， do you want to know about the
school life of American students? Listen to the tape carefully.
Step 2 Presentation第二步 呈现（时间：5分钟）
（设置并板书听力任务。）
T: Listen to the tape and answer the following questions.
How do American students usually get to school?
Where do they eat lunch?
Do they have a short break after lunch?
What time do the classes finish in the afternoon?
What do they often do in their spare time?
（听录音，回答问题。）
walk or take a yellow school bus...eat out...have a short break...finish
classes...in their spare time
（将关键词写在黑板上，呈现1a，向学生讲解中、美学生学校生活的异同。）
Step 3 Consolidation第三步 巩固（时间：5分钟）
1.（老师放录音1a，示范让学生跟读，用铅笔标重读与语调。）
T: Follow the tape and draw “up or down” with your pencil like this.
2.（老师让学生擦去所标重读与语调，先自读，然后跟录音一起读。）
T: Rub them clean and now read and check your pronunciation sentence by sentence.Go!
3.（人机对话，即学生和录音机对话。）
T: You are Michael. Listen to interviewer and make a dialog with her.
4.（看第二步呈现黑板上的关键词，学生两人一组表演1a。）
T: Work in pairs. Close your book， look at the blackboard and act the dialog out.
Step 4 Practice第四步 练习（时间：15分钟）
1.（学生做1b Pair work。）
T: Practice the dialogs in 1b in pairs.
2.（学生两人之间互相采访。）
T: Work in pairs. Suppose one of you is an interviewer. Do an interview between you and your partner.
3.（老师出示一张Wang Junfeng打游戏机的图片。）
T: I usually play soccer after school. What does you usually do after school， S1?
S1: I usually read books.
T: Look at this picture. What does Wang Junfeng usually do after school?
S1: He usually plays computer games.
T: Do you often play computer games?
S1: No， I don’t.
T: How often do you go to the Net Bar?
S1: Seldom.
T: That’s very good.
T: Do you often play computer games， S2?
S2: Yes， I do.
T: How often do you go to the Net Bar?
S2: Very often.
T: That’s too bad! Work must come first!
（板书）
play soccer踢足球play computer games打电脑游戏
Work must come first!工作第一！
4.（老师出示一张Yu Jing在看图书的图片。）
T: What do you usually do after school， S3?
S3:I usually play basketball.
T: Now， look at this picture. What does Yu Jing usually do after school?
S3:He usually reads story books.
T: Do you often read books in the library?
S3:Yes， I do./No， I don’t.
T: How often do you go to the library?
（老师引出并教学once/twice/three times a week，然后让学生回答。）
S3:Once a week.
T: That’s good. We must study hard.
（老师板书关键词。）
read story books看故事书once/twice/three times a week一周一次/两次/三次
（用同样方法教学clean， dance， roller skating板书）
clean the house打扫房子go dancing去跳舞go roller skating去滑旱冰
5.（让学生练习2 Pair work。）
T: Look at the pictures. Work in pairs. One asks and the other answers. Then change the roles.
6.（学生做3 Listen, ask and answer，进行链式对话。）
T: Now，let’s use the phrases in the box of 3 to do a chain work like this.
S1:Do you often...?
S2:Yes， I do./No， I don’t.
S1:How often do you...?
S2:Once/Twice/Three times a week./Very often./Every day./Seldom... Do you often...?
S3:...
Step 5 Project第五步 综合探究活动（时间：10分钟）
1.（学生做调查报告，并向全班汇报。）
T: Make a survey of your classmates and fill in the chart. Then report it to your class.
A: How often do you watch TV?
B: Once a week…
watch TV
in the evening Walk to school play computer games help your parents play basketball
Li Ming Once a week
Report: Li Ming watches TV in the evening once a week...
2.（让学生就中外学生学校生活的异同做比较。）
（把全班学生分成四组，每小组在一起讨论关于中美学生不同学习生活的资料，由一人
进行归纳总结。然后每组推荐出一个小记者，向全班同学汇报，所有同学要求记录下来。
需用纸制话筒，椅子等。）
T: The whole class talk about something about the different school lives between American
students and Chinese students. Then write them down.
Example:
In America， students walk or take a yellow school bus. In China， students...
3. Homework:
(1)Write a passage about what you usually do or seldom do in a week.
Example:
I usually go to school on foot. I seldom...
(2)回家通过多种渠道收集有关中西方国家的文化差异的信息。
(3)归纳所有的频度副词。
Section D
The main activities are 1，2 and 5. 本课重点活动是1，2和5。
Ⅰ. Teaching aids and demands 教学目标
1. Learn the phonetics:
｜溃，｜茫，｜t溃，｜d茫
2. Talk about daily grammars:
（1）Talk about adverbs of frequency:
seldom， never， sometimes， often， usually， always
（2）Talk about the simple present tense:
①How do you usually go to school?
I usually go to school on foot.
②How does Michael often go to school?
He often walks to school.
③How often do you go to the library?
Three times a week.
3. Talk about daily routines.
Ⅱ. Teaching aids 教具
音标卡片/录音机/人体钟/课件
Ⅲ. Five-finger Teaching Plan五指教学方案
Step 1 Review第一步 复习（时间：10分钟）
1.（用“Happy New Year!”来导入复习并做4b。活跃课堂气氛，引起学生兴趣。）
T: Let’s sing the song “Happy New Year!” together.
2.（呈现“The early bird catches the worm.”，并译成汉语，勉励学生勤奋学习。板书如下：）
The early bird catches the worm.
笨鸟先飞/早起的鸟儿有虫吃。
3.（检查上节课到社会上做调查表的作业，找几位同学读出自己调查的结果，公布于全班
同学。培养学生的成就感，社会责任感。）
T: Take out your surveys. I’ll ask some students to report your answers to the class.
4.（听录音，做3。第一遍，学生只听，第二遍，边听边写下答案，第三遍，边听边连线。）
T: First， just listen.
Second， listen and write.
Third， listen and match.
5.（听完录音，核对答案。叫学生把句子写在黑板上，也许在学生重抄句子的过程中能发
现自己的错误。培养自我发现、自我总结能力。）
T: Please come to the front to write your answers on the blackboard. If your answers are wrong,
correct them. Now， check your answers.
Step 2 Presentation第二步 呈现（时间：5分钟）
1.（全班学生人手各执一卡片，卡片上只有教学目标中列出的4个音标，做1。老师读其中
的一个音标，所有执那个音标卡片的学生全站起来，依次类推，做完4个音标的训练。
全班动员，人人参与。）
T: Everyone has a card. If I read ｜｜， raise your card ｜｜. If I read ｜t｜，
please raise your card ｜t｜. Do you understand?
2.（一学生读卡片上的音标，其所在小组其它成员均举起他/她读的音标卡片。）
T: Practice in groups. One reads the phonetics, others raise your cards.
3.（接龙游戏。第一个学生读一个音标，全班其余的有这个音标卡片的同学都边举卡片边
读。）
T: Let’s have a new game. Example: S1 reads ｜｜， if you have the card ｜｜， please
raise your card and read it out.
4.（预习2，划出交通工具的名词和一般现在时的句子。）
Step 3 Consolidation第三步 巩固（时间：10分钟）
1.（听录音1，模仿原文语音语调。）
T: Listen to 1， read after the tape. Pay attention to your pronunciation.
2.（检查学生们是否已划出2中全文的一般现在时及交通工具。）
T: Look at 2. Where are the simple present tense?
Who wants to say: please!
Well done. Clap your hands for him/her!
Who wants to talk about the means of transport?
Wonderful! Today I’m very glad. Why? Do you know?
3.（两人一组，全班合作，接龙游戏，做2。找学生读一句英语，他的下一位同学要翻译此句，依次类推。）
T: Would you love to play a game again?
Ss: ...
T: These are rules.
Example:
S1: Read the first sentence in English.
S2: Say the same sentence in Chinese.
S3: Read the second sentence in English.
S4: Say the same sentence in Chinese.
S5: Read the third sentence in English.
S6: Say the same sentence in Chinese.
Work in pairs and do 2. Can you catch me now?
OK， begin!
4.（分组活动，全班分三大组，一组读译一段课文。）
T: Now，work in groups. We have three groups. One group read the first part in both English
and Chinese， the other group read the second part in both English and Chinese，the last
group read the third part in both English and Chinese. Go!
5.（男女生互相监督。男生用英语读全文，女生翻译出全文，其余的男、女生监督他俩是
否有错误。若有错误老师及时给予纠正。）
Step 4 Practice第四步 练习（时间：10分钟）
1.（不看课文填表。培养锻炼学生的记忆能力。）
T: Don’t look at your books and fill in the chart on page 8.
2.（人体钟游戏。某学生用肢体当时钟，其余同学复述2中的内容。）
T: Do you want to play a new game? A body clock. One student is a clock like this，all the rest retell the story on page 7. Example:
（让一同学用手臂表示时针和分针。游戏方法：主持人发令：Ready. Go!作“钟”的同
学摆出姿势，摆出page 7短文中出现的时间，其他同学根据姿势猜时刻后，再复述出这个时间点里Jane所做的事情及活动。）
3.（制作表格，介绍自己一天的活动。）
T: Make a new chart about your daily activities.
4.（利用课件，全班学生一起做1。）
5.（利用课件，简单归纳一般现在时，设计如下：）
（1）A: What time is it?
B: It’s seven o’clock.
（2）We want to know about the school life of American students.
（3）A: Do they have a short break after lunch?
B: No， they don’t.
（4）A: How do you usually go to school?
B: I usually go to school on foot.
（5）A: How does Michael often go to school?
B: He often walks to school.
（6）A: How often do you go to the library?
B: Three times a week.
Step 5 Project 第五步 综合探究活动（时间：10分钟）
1.（分组活动。做1。一组负责一个音标，总结所有学过单词中发这个音的单词。）
T: Do 1 on Page 7 in groups. First we’re divided into 4 groups. You’ll collect the words which pronounces the same phonetic in your brain.
2.（四人活动，使用音标图片一起学习这4个音标的正确发音。）
T: Let’s practice the four phonetics in groups.
Every group has four members.
3.（找几位学生把总结出来的所有单词向大家汇报。）
T: Have you finished your collection? I’ll ask some students to report your answers to the class.
4.（独立学习，做1和 2。）
T: Work alone 1 and 2.
5.（制表格做5，复习这一个话题学过的句型及重难点。）
T: Make a survey， just do 5 on page 8.
Use the sentences and pay attention to the key words.
6.（分组讨论，做2，为下步布置作业作准备。）
T: Talk about 2 on page 7 in groups.
7. Homework:
Write a passage about your daily activities.
Topic 2
Section A
The main activities are 1，2a and 3.本课重点活动是1，2a和3。
Ⅰ. Teaching aims and demands教学目标
1. Learn the names of school buildings:
playground， lab， room， gym， classroom， road， building， pool
2. Learn the names of other things: thing, card
3. Learn the present continuous tense:
What are you doing?
I am reading in the library.
What is he doing?
He is watching TV in the bedroom.
4. Learn likes and dislikes:
Do you like our school?
Yes，I do./No， I don’t.
I like the computer room best.
I don’t like the library.
Ⅱ. Teaching aids教具
录音机
Ⅲ. Five-finger Teaching Plan五指教学方案
Step 1 Review 第一步 复习（时间：10分钟）
1.（做一个调查，调查学生是否喜欢校园生活，在课余经常做什么活动，为校园场所名称
的学习埋下伏笔，也为现在进行时的学习提供动词词组。）
S1: =Yuan Hong
T: Today I want to make a survey. Yuan Hong， please answer my questions. Do you like
our school life?
S1: Yes， I like our school life.
T: What do you usually do in your spare time?
S1: I usually play basketball.
T: Thank you. ××，what do you usually do in your spare time?
S2: I often read books.
T: What about you， ××?
S3: I often go swimming.
...
2.（询问学生通常在哪里做上述活动，呈现校园场所名称。）
T: I know you can have happy school life. Yuan Hong usually plays basketball.××（S2）
often reads books.××（S3）often goes swimming...Please answer my questions now.
Where do we play basketball?
S1: Playground.
T: Where do we read story books?
S2: Library.
T: Where do we swim?
S3: Swimming pool.
...
（让学生根据预习，说出校园内场所的名称。）
T: Can you name the school buildings?
S1: Library，dining hall...
S2: Gym，lab...
...
3.（让学生跟读1的录音，并把词与图正确搭配。）
T: Please listen to the tape and repeat. Then write the letters in the right place on the picture.
4.（引导学生观察1的图画，呈现现在进行时态。）
T: Look at the picture. We can see a student in the library. What’s he doing? He’s reading a
book.
（板书句型。）
What’s he doing?
He’s reading a book.
（让学生听图中的对话，并板书。）
T: Listen to the tape and repeat.
What’re you doing?
I’m reading Harry Potter.
（让学生试着判断上面两个句型是用来表述什么时间下的动作。）
T：（用汉语）黑板上两个句型中的动作是发生在什么时间的？
Ss：现在正在进行的动作。
T: That’s right. When we express something is happening， we use the present continuous tense.
(让学生跟读句子，总结现在进行时的结构特点。)
T: Please read after me. And find the rules of the present continuous tense. He’s reading a book.
Ss: He’s reading a book.
T: I’m reading Harry Potter.
Ss: I’m reading Harry Potter.
T: Do you find the rules?
Ss: Yes. be + doing.
be+doing
be动词+动词ing形式
Step 2 Presentation第二步 呈现（时间：5分钟）
（让学生听、读2a对话，完成2b表格。）
T：Please listen to the tape， then read it again. Fill in the chart in 2b.
Name Kangkang Maria Wang Wei
Favorite place
Things he/she is doing
Step 3 Consolidation第三步 巩固（时间：5分钟）
1.（让学生跟读对话。）
T：Listen to the tape and repeat.
2.（让学生分角色朗读。）
T：Please work in pairs， read the dialog.
3.（让学生根据对话内容，回答问题。）
T: Please answer my questions. Which place does Michael like best?
S1: Computer room.
T: Which place does Jane like best?
S2: She likes the swimming pool best.
T: Which place does Kangkang like best?
S3: ...
...
4.（让学生合上书本，根据对话内容说出Michael等5位同学分别喜欢的地点。）
T: They like different places. Please tell me which place they like best.
S1: Michael likes computer room best. Jane likes...
S2: ..
Step 4 Practice 第四步 练习（时间：12分钟）
1.（问学生Kangkang等人正在做什么。）
T: Look at the pictures in 2a. Answer my questions.
What’s Kangkang doing?
S1: Kang is playing soccer.
T: What’s Maria doing?
S2: She is reading a story book.
T: What’s Wang Wei doing?
S3: He is sleeping.
2.（让学生跟读3中的对话。）
T: Please listen to the tape and repeat.
（根据对话内容提问，让学生回答，呈现现在进行时的一般疑问句形式。）
T: Is Jane doing her homework?
Ss: No， she isn’t.
T: Is Jane watching TV?
Ss: Yes， she is.
T: Is Michael playing basketball?
Ss: No， he isn’t.
T: What’s he doing?
Ss: He’s making cards.
3.（让学生根据4的图画进行两人对话。）
T: Please look at the pictures in 4. Ask and answer in pairs.
S1: Where is she?
S2: She is in the gym.
S1: Is she singing?
S2: No， she isn’t.
S1: What’s she doing?
S2: She’s dancing.
Step 5 Project 第五步 综合探究活动（时间：13分钟）
1.（让学生调查班级的同学喜欢校园的哪里及原因。）
T: Please make a survey. And fill in the chart.
Name Favorite place Why
Wei Wei playground likes playing soccer
（让学生根据调查内容做报告。）
T: Please report what you surveyed.
S1: Wei Wei likes playground. He likes playing soccer.
...
2.（让学生根据chant的内容做动作。）
T: I’ll chant. Please perform the action when I chant.
What’re you doing now?
I am swimming now.
（学生做游泳动作。）
What’re you doing now?
I am running now.
（学生做跑步动作。）
...
3.（请一个学生到台上做动作，其它同学用现在进行时态进行问答。）
T: Li Juan， come here.（出示一个dance的动词卡片给她看。）Please perform the action.
（学生表演跳舞动作。）
T: What is she doing?
S: She’s dancing.
...
4.（作业，要求学生调查班级同学课余最喜欢做什么，最喜欢校园的什么场所。）
T: Please make a survey. What does your friend often do in spare time? Which place does
he/she like best and why? And write a short passage.
SectionB
The main activities are 1a， 2 and 3a.本课重点活动是1a， 2和3a。
Ⅰ. Teaching aids and demands教学目标
1. learn other useful words and expressions:
most, better, minute， shelf， great, dear， borrow, of course, keep， return， post, newspaper, purse， money， anything， else, nothing, meal, umbrella
2. Talk about the present continuous tense:
What are you doing?
I’m looking for my purse.
Are you playing basketball?
No， I’m not.
3. Talk about how to buy and borrow things.
4. Talk about Lost and Found.
Ⅱ.Teaching aids教具
录音机/图片/报纸/书/课件
Ⅲ. Five-finger Teaching Plan五指教学方案
Step 1 Review第一步 复习（时间：10分钟）
1.（检查上次作业。）
T: Now， let’s check homework. S1， S2， S3 and S4， please report your answers to the class. S1， you， first. Go!
2.（两人对话。复习现在进行时。）
T: Work in pairs. Look at Page 10， 4， and make dialogs like these sentences. Attention!
Present continuous. I’ll give you two minutes to prepare. Then I’ll ask two students to act
out your dialogs.
3.（三人搭档活动。一位学生手拿任意一张图片或在黑板上画简笔画，另两位学生一问一
答，继续复习现在进行时的句子或一般现在时的句子。）
T: Work in groups. This time I’ll ask three students to act the picture out. How to do it?
（老师随即叫出三位学生，吩咐他们各自要做的任务。）
4.（老师与学生两人一起表演在书店买书的过程。导入1a。老师参与表演，学生会更加积
极地参与课堂教学活动。）
T: Let’s play a game.
（老师手拿一本仁爱版的英语教辅书。）
T: Boys and girls. I want to buy a book like this. Who is the boss of a bookstore? Who loves to act with me?
Step 2 Presentation第二步 呈现（时间：5分钟）
1.（利用课件或图片呈现1a。若用图片，老师课前应该已要求学生将有关书店买书活动的
新单词制成卡片，卡片上尽量显示图画和单词两部分。老师现在手拿一张书店的图片，
图片的下面写着“bookstore”。）
T: Look at the picture， where is it?
Ss: “书店”。
T: What is this in English? Read after me， please.
（老师拿着一张一学生正在买书的图片）
T: What is he doing now? S1， do you know?
S1: I think he is buying books.
2. (老师假设一种情景：假如你买不到想要的图书，那该怎么办吗？对，应该很有礼貌地向别人借一下。)
T: Let’s learn 1b. Learn how to borrow books from others.
T: Excuse me, may I borrow this book?
S1: Sure! Here you are!
T: How long can I keep it?
S2: Two weeks.
(同时把重、难点板书在黑板上。)
May I borrow...?
Sure!/Certainly!/Of course.
You must .../Thank you anyway.
You’re welcome.
Step 3 Consolidation第三步 巩固（时间：5分钟）
1.（听录音，做1a。）
T: Look at 1a. Just listen， please.
2.（表演竞赛。教室前面一书架上摆满仁爱版和其他版本图书，然后找三组学生表演1a，
最后学生们自己评出哪组表演的最优秀。老师对胜出者给予仁爱版图书以奖励。）
T: Work in groups. Three groups will come to the front of the classroom to act. Do you love
Ren’ai books? If you win， I will give two Ren’ai books to the winners. Which group will
win? Ready， please. (Two minutes later.) Let’s begin to act the dialogs out.
3.（双人对话。找两位学生表演1b，一学生买不到书，然后找好朋友借。）
T: Don’t look at your books. Now， I will ask two students to act 1b out. S1 and S2， you，
please.
Step 4 Practice第四步 练习（时间：15分钟）
1.（老师又拿出一学生像在路上寻找东西的图片。）
T: Well done. S2， look at the picture.Guess， what is he doing?
S2: I think he is looking for something.
T: You are right. He lost something.
（板书上句中划线单词lost，导入3a。板书如下：）
Lost: Found:
I lost a book. A book.
（一人正在寻找东西的图片。） Please call:
Please call: 8856309 8821437
寻物启示 失物招领
（老师解释板书的内容，叫学生预习3a一分钟。）
2.（让学生人手三张卡片，分别写上数字号码1、2、3，以备胜出者用。）
T: Are you ready? The first group， please.
（第一组表演结束后。）
T: Well done! Let’s clap for them. The second group， are you ready? Please.
（三组都表演结束后。）
T: Now， let’s choose the best group. which group is the best? Raise the number card. Go!
3.（听录音，做2和3a。）
T: Be quiet， please. Let’s listen to the tape. Don’t look at your books. Just listen， please.
（放完录音后。）
T: Now， look at your books， 2 and 3a on Page 12. Read after the tape.
（老师开始重放2的录音。）
4.（双人对话，做1b。）
T: Work in pairs. Do 1b on the Page 11. Pay attention to the key words and phrases.
（老师强调重、难点。）
May I borrow...?
Sure!/Certainly!/Of course.
You must do...
Thank you./Thank you anyway.
You’re welcome.
5.（分组表演。做2，全班分四组表演，每一组中每次抽出三人分别扮演Michael， Maria
和Girl。）
T: Work in groups and do 2. Now we have four groups. Every group sends three members to
be as Michael， Maria and Girl.
6.（表演竞赛。用表演1a的竞赛规则或方式来做2。）
T: Would you love to be winners? Do you want to get the red flag? Let’s do 2. How to do it?...
Step 5 Project第五步 综合探究活动（时间：10分钟）
1.（听录音，复述或复习1a， 2和3a的内容。）
（1）（先找一学生回忆1a的内容，然后听录音1a，再让其复述1a的内容。）
T: Boys and girls. Have you remebered the story of 1a? S1, you want to try? Retell the story,
please. Let’s clap for him/her!
（2）（鼓励更多的学生来参与复述2课文内容。）
T: S2， do you want to try? Try to retell the story of 2. Who else? Raise your hand. Wow， so many!
（3）（分组表演竞赛，做3a。表演即复习3a的内容。）
2. Homework:
（1）写一篇有关买书过程的小短文，大约10句话。
（2）写一则失物招领启示，不少于两个句子。
（3）预习13页的1a。
（4）如有兴趣，画一张本校的建筑物分布图。
Section C
The main activities are 1a and 2a.本课重点活动是1a和2a。
Ⅰ. Teaching aims and demands教学目标
1. Learn other useful words and expressions:
plan, next to,near， upstairs， news， attention， between, movie, show, hall, program, gone,
wind, activity,stamp， world
2. Talk about news and poster.
Ⅱ.Teaching aids教具
录音机／图片／挂图／单词卡片
Ⅲ. Five-finger Teaching Plan五指教学方案
Step 1 Review第一步 复习（时间：15分钟）
1.（对话表演，全班分为四组，每组各表演一个对话，其他学生认真听，找错误。对话时
间以一分钟为限，老师数句子，称为一分钟对话。第一组学生借东西，可以在教室内走
动。第二组东西丢了，去失物招领处找回来。第三组去书店买书。第四组请一个学生表
演动作，另两个学生用现在进行时对话。通过这个活动来热身，吸引学生的注意力，复
习现在进行时并复习前面的对话。）
T: Group 1， please!
S1: ...
S2: ...
T: Very good! 20 sentences! Can you find any mistakes in the dialog?...Yeah， you’re right.
Let’s go on， Group 2， please!
...
2.（贴一张本校的图片在黑板上，先把左边的学校场所名称用纸张遮起来。）
CLASSROOM BUILDING（教学楼。）
（1、2、3、4、5、6、7、8八间教室，9、10老师办公室，11、12、13、14、15、16学生宿舍。）
T: Look at the picture， answer my questions:
（指着电脑室。）
T: What are they doing?
Ss： They are playing on the computer.
T: What’s the name of the room? Can you guess?
Ss: Yes, computer room.
T： Where’s the computer room?
S1: It’s in the classroom building.
S2：It’s next to the lab.
T： Good. We can also say，“It’s upstairs.”它在楼上。
（板书划线部分，英汉对照，导入新词upstairs。）
T：Which room is upstairs next to the computer room?
S3： I think it’s a lab. Is it right?
T: Right.
（指着图书馆。）
T: What are they doing?
S4: They are reading books.
T: hat’s the name of the room?
S5: Library. Is it a library?
T: You are right. Where is the library?
S6: It’s next to the room. I think it’s next to the gym. It’s a gym near(在……附近)the library.Because many students are dancing in the room. So I guess it’s a gym.
T: Well done! What’s the meaning of “near”? You know， yes， 在……附近。Who can
tell me, where is the dormitory building?
S7： It’s near the classroom building.它在教学楼附近。
（板书划线部分。通过以上活动，不仅导入新词near， upstairs，而且复习了学校场所
名称和现在进行时。）
Step 2 Presentation 第二步 呈现（时间：5分钟）
1.（设置并板书听力任务。）
T: Listen to the tape and answer the questions:
（1）Where is my classroom?
（2）What do you do after school?
（3）What are near my classroom?
（4）Where is the computer room?
（听录音，回答问题。）
next to-near-upstairs-play soccer
（将关键词写在黑板上，呈现出1。）
2.（在平面图上填写学校场所。）
T: Read the passage and complete the places of the school.
Step 3 Consolidation 第三步 巩固（时间：5分钟）
1.（老师放录音1a。学生跟读。）
T: Follow the tape and repeat loudly.
2.（看图和黑板上的关键词复述短文。）
3.（完成1b和1c）
Step 4 Practice 第四步 练习（时间：15分钟）
1.（听2a的录音，回答问题。板书问题。）
（1）When does the game begin?
（2）Where is the game?
（3）When does the movie Gone with the Wind begin?
（4）When does the movie The sound of Music begin?
（5）Where can we watch the movies?
2.（学生跟读2a。）
3.（学生听做2b。）
4.（做3。）
T: Read Poster 1 and then fill in the blanks of Poster 2.
5.（用单词卡片再现本课新词，并造句。）
Examples：
T: What’s this in English， please?
Ss： Attention， please.
（出示“新闻”卡片。）
T: What’s this in English， please?
Ss: News. It’s a piece of news.它是一则新闻。
（出示“在……之间”卡片。）
Ss: Between， he sits between you and me.
（出示“邮票”卡片。）
T: How to say“邮票，邮展”in English?
S1: Stamp， stamp collection show.
（出示“世界”卡片。）
T: What’s this in English? How to say “在世界上”in English?
S2: World. In the world.
（出示“礼堂”卡片。）
S3: Hall. Come and see the stamp collection show in the school hall.
T: Wonderful， you are good boys and girls.
Step 5 Project 第五步 综合探究活动（时间：5分钟）
1.（描述理想的学校，把它画下来，每组请一个学生到黑板上画。）
2. (假设星期六晚上学校要在礼堂举行一个歌舞晚会，请一起制作一个海报。)
3. Homework：
（1）(复习本单元单词，以便下节课单词竞赛。)
（2）(准备一分钟对话。)
Section D
The main activities are 1，3a and 5.本课重点活动是1，3a和5。
Ⅰ. Teaching aims and demands教学目标
1. Learn the phonetics：
||, ||, ||, ||
2. Learn other useful words and expressions：
traffic, child, exercise, Japanese, the Great Wall, wonderful
3. Review the present continuous tense:
I’m looking for a book.
He isn’t cleaning the dormitory.
Are you doing your homework?
Yes， I am.／No， I’m not.
Is he／she...?
Yes， he／she is.／No， he／she isn’t.
What is he／she doing?
He／She is...
4. Talk about news.
Ⅱ. Teaching aids教具
录音机／单词卡片
Ⅲ. Five-finger Teaching Plan 五指教学方案
Step 1 Review 第一步 复习（时间：15分钟）
1.（单词竞赛，老师抽查三排学生，被抽到的排，从左到右往下轮，每个学生读并拼出一
个单词，造一个句子。用上现在进行时态，单词一分，句子两分。全班同学一起找错误，
找到一个错误加两分。）
Example：
T： Please read the names of the school building， and make a sentence. One by one.
S1：Library. In the library. I’m reading in the library.
S2：Playground. On the playground. I’m running on the playground.
S3：Pool. The swimming pool. He’s swimming in the swimming pool.
（复习前面三课的单词，板书如下：）
library， playground， lab， room， gym， building， pool， motorcycle， road，
shelf， physics， keep， return， borrow
（通过竞赛，吸引学生注意力，活跃课堂气氛，调动学习积极性。）
2.（一分钟对话，复习现在进行时的肯定句，否定句，一般疑问句，特殊疑问句及其回答。）
(比赛规则：老师抽一排，全班4组8对学生，编一个对话进行比赛，时间为一分钟。请
一个同学计时，老师数句子。一句一分，全班同学找错误，找到一个错误加两分，鼓励
学生，并能提高听力能力。)
3.（老师拿出一张照片，上面是一个日本女孩在健身房跳健美操。）
T： She is my pen pal， do you like her?
Ss： Yes, she is a beautiful girl， I like her a lot.
T： Is she running?
Ss： No， she isn’t.
T： What’s she doing?
Ss： She is dancing.
T： Yeah, right. She is taking exercise in the gym. 她在健身房做锻炼。Do you like taking
exercise?
Ss： Yes, we do.
T： Where is she from? Do you know?
Ss： She is from Japanese.
T： No， you are wrong. She is from Japan. She is Japanese. She is a Japanese girl.她是日本人，她是一个日本女孩。
（板书划线部分，英汉对照。导入exercise， Japanese。）
S1： I know， Kamiko is from Japan， she is Japanese.
S2： Xiaodingdang is from Japan， Kangfu is a Japanese boy.
S3： Yingtaoxiaowangzi is a Japanese girl， too.
T：You are all clever， you love cartoons. Who likes taking exercise in the cartoons? Can you
tell me?
S4： Daxiong likes taking exercise， so he is very strong.
S5： Kangfu doesn’t like taking exercise， so he is short and weak.
T：Good， you are wonderful.
Step 2 Presentation 第二步 呈现（时间：10分钟）
1.（呈现含/ts/、/dz/、/tr/、/dr/的单词卡片，让学生熟悉这些发音，为下面的操练做准
备。）
T: What’s this?
S: It’s “boats”.
T: What’s that?
S: It’s “shirts”.
（板书boats， shirts，要求学生找规律。）
T： Look at these two words. What can you find out?
S1： ...
S2： ...
T： Good! Shirts “ts” makes /ts/，boats “ts” ， too.
You are clever! Read after me...
（再举个/dz/的例子，步骤同上；然后呈现/tr/音标，运用头脑风暴法要求学生尽可能多
地说出发这个音的单词，再进行归纳，讲授/dr/的方法同｜tr｜。并给出答案，谁能说出
1个单词就加1分。）
Example：
playgrounds/dz/, roads/dz/ ， Australia /tr/，interest /tr/， restaurant /tr/， draw /dr/， drink
/dr/， hundred /dr/
T: Look at /tr/. What words have the sound /tr/ in them?
S: ...
T: Clever! I think “interest， Australia” have the sound /tr/.
Let’s go on another phonetics /dr/. Who knows...?
2.（听录音，跟读1。）
T: Read after the tape， please.
3.（全班大声齐读，巩固所学单标。）
4.（看3a图，听录音，判断正误。）
T: Look and listen carefully， fill in the blanks.
（板书。）
（1）He is ________ ________ in the gym in Picture 1.
（2）In picture 2， he is swimming in the ________ ________ .
（3）In picture 3， he is talking to ________ ________ ________ on the Great Wall.
Step 3 Consolidation 第三步 巩固（时间：5分钟）
1.（再放一遍录音，并给学生两分钟时间准备，看图问答。每组请一对同学，一句加两分。）
T: Ask and answer in pairs according to the pictures as possible as you can.
Example：
A: Where is Wen Wei in Picture 1／...?
B: He is...
A: What is he doing?
B: He is...
Step 4 Practice 第四步 练习（时间：10分钟）
1.（听录音，跟读4a， 4b。让学生再复习一遍本话题的重难点。）
2.（学生做2。）
T: Listen carefully and match.
3.（连线后，再让学生把这些句子变成否定句、一般疑问句、特殊疑问句并回答。）
Example：
S1: Which place does Jane like best?
S2: I think she likes her bedroom best.
S3: Is Maria singing a song in the classroom?
S4: Yes， she is.
S5: Kangkang is playing soccer in the gym. Is it right or wrong?
S6: It’s wrong. He is playing soccer on the playground.
S7: What are their teachers doing?
S8: They are working in the office.
...
（通过双人活动，学生充分地掌握了本话题的4a和4b。）
Step 5 Project 第五步 综合探究活动（时间：5分钟）
1.（布置学生每人写一篇海报。）
2.（展示学生的海报并在班上读出来。）
Example:
Found: A yellow purse is in the Lost and Found Room. Please come to get it at 3∶00 p.m.
today.
(假设海报贴出来后，有几个同学前来认领钱包。写海报的同学当即采访他们。)
Questions：
（1）What color is the purse?
（2）What’s in the purse?
（3）Where’s the purse?
（4）What time can I get the purse?
Topic 3
Section A
The main activities are 1 and 2a.本课重点活动是1和2a。
Ⅰ. Teaching aims and demands教学目标
1.（1）Learn days of the week：
Monday， Tuesday， Wednesday， Thursday， Friday
（2）Learn subjects：
history， math， art， geography， P.E.
2. Review present continuous Wh-questions:
-What class are they having?
-They’re having a music class.
3. Talk about subjects and timetable:
-What time does the class begin?
-At ten o’clock.
-What time does it finish?
-At twenty to eleven.
Ⅱ. Teaching aids教具
录音机／图片／小黑板
Ⅲ. Five-finger Teaching Plan五指教学方案
Step 1 Review 第一步 复习（时间：15分钟）
1.（师生共同说唱，复习现在进行时。）
T: Let’s chant “What are you doing?”
What are you doing now?
I’m singing now.
What are you doing now?
I’m dancing now.
What are you doing now?
I’m walking now.
What are you doing now?
I’m playing now.
（老师一边唱，一边做动作，全班同学跟着唱，一起做动作，活跃课堂，激发学生兴趣。）
2.（通过复习，导入科目。）
T: What are you doing now?
Ss: We are singing a song.
T： What are we doing now? We can also say “We are having a class now.” What class are
we having? We are having an English class.
(我们正在上什么课？我们正在上英语课。)
（板书划线部分，英汉对照，导出新的词组have an English class。）
T: Do you have an English class every day?
Ss: Yes， we do.
T: What time does the class begin?
Ss: At ten to eight.
T: What time does the class finish?
Ss: At twenty-five to nine.
（板书划线部分，引出生词begin， finish。）
（挂出小黑板，开始呈现科目，练习问科目，上、下课时间单词。）
Subject Time
（begin-finish） What day
English 7∶50-8∶35 every day
Math 8∶45-9∶30 every day
Geography 9∶50-10∶35 Monday
History 10∶45-11∶30 Tuesday
Biology 14∶00-14∶45 Wednesday
Art 14∶55-15∶40 Thursday
P.E. 15∶50-16∶35 Friday
T: Look at the blackboard， answer my questions. Do you have a math class every day?
Ss: Yes， we do.
T: What time does the class begin?
Ss: At...
T: What time does the class finish?
Ss: At...
T: Now I give you two minutes to practice these sentences. You work in pairs.
（给学生两分钟时间练习，同桌对话。一个同学问，一个同学答，然后交换角色。）
3.（引出表示星期的单词。）
T: Do you have a Chinese class today?
Ss: Yes， we do.
T: What day is it today?
Ss: It is Monday.
（板书呈现生词Monday，学习询问今天星期几及其回答。）
T: What class do we have on Tuesday? 在星期二，我们上什么课？
Ss: History.历史课。
（帮助学生回答，并再给学生两分钟时间，练习星期的表达法。）
Step 2 Presentation 第二步 呈现（时间：5分钟）
（设置并板书听力任务。让学生带着任务听录音，可以降低难度。）
What day is it today?
What class are they having?
What time does the class begin?
What time does it finish?
（听录音，回答问题。）
Wednesday-have a music class-begin-finish
（将关键词写在黑板上，呈现出1，为下一步学生不看课本自由表演打下基础。）
Step 3 Consolidation 第三步 巩固（时间：5分钟）
1.（老师放录音1，示范让学生跟读，用铅笔标重读与语调。）
T: Follow the tape and draw “up or down” with your pencil like this.
2.（老师让学生擦去所标重读与语调，先自读，然后跟录音一起读，逐句核对语音语调。
这样做可以集中学生注意力，提高效率。）
T: Rub them clean and now read and check your pronunciation sentence by sentence. Go!
3.（人机对话，提高学生兴趣。）
T: You are Jane. Listen to Helen and make a dialog with her.
4.（学生两人一组表演1。）
T: Work in pairs. Look at the blackboard and act the dialog out.
Step 4 Practice第四步 练习（时间：10分钟）
1.（老师把一张漂亮的图片贴在黑板上，上面是一张英语课程表，下面是六个问题。）
T: Look at the timetable and answer the questions.
（1）How many lessons do you have every day?
（2）How many English lessons do you have every week?
（3）What time do morning classes begin?
（4）What time is school over?
（5）What is your favorite subject?
（6）How often do you do outdoor activities?
2.（使用动作复习有关科目和星期的单词。）
T: Now， look at me and guess， what am I doing? Which class am I in?
（老师做出唱歌跳舞的动作。）
Ss: You are singing and dancing in music class.
T: What day do you have a music class?
Ss: On Wednesday.
（让一个同学做动作，另外两个同学一问一答。）
Example：
S1: 做画画动作。
S2: What is he doing? And which class is he in?
S3: He is drawing pictures in art class.
（小组活动进行替换操练，完成2b。）
3.（呈现P183的两幅图片，双人活动，进行对话练习。）
T: Let’s read 3 and work in pairs like this：
Examples：
A: What day is it today?
B: It’s...
A: What class are they having?
B: They’re...
A: What time does the class begin?
B: At...
A: What time does the class finish?
B: At...
4.（让学生做4。）
T: Listen and fill in the chart.
Step 5 Project 第五步 综合探究活动（时间：10分钟）
1.（做一个调查，采访班上的同学，了解他们一周中每一天喜欢的科目及原因。）
T: Please design your favorite timetable for a week and fill in the chart.
Time Favorite subject Like／Dislike Reasons What day
8∶00-9∶00 Art Like very much Like drawing pictures Monday
Tuesday
Wednesday
Thursday
Friday
2.（学生完成调查表格后，把调查结果汇报给全班同学。）
T: You can report it to your class like this：
On Monday， my favorite subject is art. It begins at eight and finishes at nine. I like it very
much. Because I like drawing pictures.
3. Homework：
(做英语课程表。)
Section B
The main activities are 1a and 2.本课重点活动是1a和2。
Ⅰ. Teaching aims and demands教学目标
1. Learn some useful words and expressions：
question， Australia， easy， interesting， difficult， boring
2. Talk about likes and dislikes：
Why do／don’t you like English?
Because it’s easy and interesting.／Because it’s difficult and boring.
Ⅱ. Teaching aids教具
录音机／小黑板／卡片／图片／照片／投影仪
Ⅲ. Five瞗inger Teaching Plan 五指教学方案
Step 1 Review第一步 复习（时间：15分钟）
1.（师生互动复习旧问候语。）
T: Good morning， class.
Ss: Good morning， Miss...／Mr....
T: What day is it today?
Ss: It is...
T: What class are we having?
Ss: We’re having an English class.
（提问全班男生。）
T: What time does the class begin?
Boys: At...
（提问全班女生。）
T: What time does it finish？
Girls: At...
2.（分组讨论问题，复习有关科目、星期的特殊疑问句。）
T: OK， very good! Now take out your schedule， look at it and ask and answer in groups.
取出一个小黑板，呈现以下问题：
Questions：
（1）How many lessons do you have every day?
（2）How many English／Chinese...lessons do you have every week?
（3）What time is school over?
（4）What is your favorite subject?
（5）How often do you do outdoor activities?
3.（请一组同学到讲台上进行连锁问答，第一个人问，第二个人答，第二个人接着问，第
三个人答。）
4. ①（使用单词卡片教学生词question， Australia， easy, difficult， interesting,boring。）
②（把生词先变成词组，再变成句子，进行扩充操练。）
（出示question的单词卡。）
Example：
T: Do you have any questions? Yes or no?
Ss: No， we have no questions.
（出示Australia单词卡。）
T: Australia. I come from Australia.
（出示first单词卡，指着第一排的第一个同学。）
T: You are the first in row one. May I ask you the first question? What do you think of our
school life?
S1: I like the school life.
（出示last单词卡，指着这一排的最后一个同学。）
T: Well done， you are the last one. May I ask you the last question? Do you like the school life?
S2: Yes， I like it， too.
（出示easy和difficult的单词卡。）
T: Do you like math? Is it easy or difficult?
S3: Yes， I do. It’s easy.
S4: No， I don’t think so. I think it’s difficult.
（出示interesting和boring的单词卡。）
T: Do you like playing games? Why?
S5: Yes， I do. Because it’s interesting.
T: Wonderful， then do you like learning about the past?
S6: No， I don’t. It’s boring.
③（用情景对话来复习巩固本课的生词。假设班上来了一个教师Mr.White，请一个同学扮演这个角色，大家来采访他，一个同学问一个问题，尽量用上新词。）
Example：
S1: Where do you come from?
Mr.White: I come from Australia.
S2: Are you a teacher?
Mr.White: Yes， I am.
S3: Do you like English?
Mr.White: Yes， I do.
S4: Why do you like English?
Mr.White: Because it’s easy and interesting.
S5: Do you like Chinese?
Mr.White: No， I don’t.
S6: Why don’t you like it?
Mr.White: Because it’s difficult and boring.
Step 2 Presentation第二步 呈现（时间：10分钟）
1.（设置并板书听力任务，让学生带着任务听录音。）
T: Listen to the tape， make True（T）or False（F） for these sentences and correct them.
（1）Ms. Jones comes from America.
（2）She teaches English.
（3）She teaches Grade 2.
（4）She has twelve lessons every week.
（5）She likes the school life.
Step 3 Consolidation 第三步 巩固（时间：10分钟）
1.（老师放录音1a，示范让学生跟读，用铅笔标重读与语调。）
T: Follow the tape and draw “up or down” with your pencil like this.
2.（老师让学生擦去所标重读与语调，先自读，然后跟录音一起读，逐句核对语音语调。）
T: Rub them clean and read and check your pronunciation sentence by sentence. Let’s begin.
3.（全班分成两组操练分别扮演新闻记?
仁爱七年级英语教案 篇6
Topic 1 Welcome to China!
Section A
The main activities are 1a, 2a and 3a. 本课重点活动是1a, 2a和3a。
Ⅰ.Teaching aims and demands 教学目标
1.(1)Learn the letters Aa-Gg.
(2)Learn some new words:
good, morning, welcome, to, China, thank, you, hello, I, am, are, yes, no, not, nice, meet, too
2. Learn about greetings and introductions:
(1)-Good morning.
-Good morning.
(2)-Welcome to China!
-Thank you./Thanks.
(3)-Hello/Hi!
-Hello/Hi!
(4)-I’m … Are you …?
-Yes, I am./No, I’m not. I’m …
(5)-Nice to meet you.
-Nice to meet you, too.
Ⅱ. Teaching aids 教具
投影仪/教学挂图/录音机/字母卡片/小黑板
Ⅲ. Five-finger Teaching Plan 五指教学方案
Step 1 Introduction 第一步 介绍(时间:6分钟)
本节课是开篇，教师应向全体学生说明以下两点：1.学习英语的重要性。2.学习英语的正确方法。目的：激发学生学习英语的兴趣，使学生树立自信心，养成良好的学习习惯和形成有效的学习策略。
Step 2 Presentation 第二步 呈现(时间:9分钟)
呈现简单的打招呼用语，并进行听说练习，学以致用。
1. (运用真实情境，让学生学会如何与他人简单地打招呼。)
(1)(教师向一名学生做手势以示打招呼。)
T: Hello!
S1: Hello!(启发学生回答。)
(板书Hello!让学生猜测其意思并掌握。)
hello
(师生互动操练Hello!)
T: Hello!
Ss: Hello!
(2)(用同样的方式教学Hi!板书并要求学生理解。)
-Hello! = -Hi!(非正式)
-Hello! -Hi!
(同时教师可以请一位学生帮忙，示范熟人之间应怎样打招呼，并让学生之间用真实姓名依次操练。)
T: Please look at us and see how we are greeting. Then you can use your names to greet each other.(教师给以适当的汉语提示。)
T: Hi, Li Lei!
S2: Hi, Mr./Miss××.
S3: Hi, Zhang Hua!
S4: Hi, Chen Jun!
S5: Hello, Zhou Jie!
S6: Hello, Zheng Hua!
(3)(教师亲切地用手势跟同学们打招呼。)
T: Good morning!
(重复几遍后，启发学生回答。)
Ss: Good morning!
(板书并要求学生掌握。)
Good morning!
(让学生猜测Good morning!的意思，教师给予提示：早上见面问好可用Good morning!代替Hello!师生互动操练Good morning!)
(教师让学生用自己的真实姓名互动操练Hi!/Hello!/Good morning!)
S7: Hi! S8.
S8: Hi! S7.
S9: Hello! S10.
S10:Hello! S9.
S11:Good morning! S12.
S12:Good morning! S11.
…
(对学生的表演给予掌声鼓励。)
2. (用投影仪或教学挂图出示1a，图中康康在接机大厅接人，三个外国学生刚下飞机。问学生：他们之间应该怎样打招呼呢?)
Ss: Hi!/Hello!/Good morning!
(利用上面图片教学China，板书并要求学生掌握。)
China
T: Good morning! Welcome to China!
Ss: Good morning! Thank you./Thanks.(帮助学生回答。)
(板书并教学，要求学生掌握。)
-Welcome to China!
-Thank you./Thanks.
(师生互动操练以上对话。)
3. (播放1a录音, 让学生跟读, 注意模仿语音语调。)
T: Listen to the tape and follow. Pay attention to the pronunciation and intonation.
4. (出示四个小主人公的人物图，让学生认识他们，并教学生读Kangkang, Michael, Jane,
Maria四个名字，教师播放1b录音，完成1b。核对答案并打分。)
Step 3 Consolidation 第三步 巩固(时间:12分钟)
通过师生对话，教学自我介绍的功能用语，并进行练习和表演，让学生运用所学英语进行简单交际。
1. (1)(教学I’m … Are you …? Yes, I am./No, I’m not.)
(教师找两名男生和两名女生分别扮演Kangkang, Michael, Jane, Maria。分别教他们说I’m Kangkang. I’m Michael. I’m Jane. I’m Maria. 引出I’m=I am. 再问Are you …? Yes, I am./ No, I am not.)
(板书并要求学生掌握。)
-I’m …
-Are you …?
-Yes, I am./ No, I’m not.
(教师向全班同学介绍自己，然后请几个学生向全班同学打招呼，并做自我介绍。)
T: Hi!/Hello! I’m … (教师手指着自己，并引导学生做自我介绍。)
S1: Hi!/Hello! I’m Wu San. (S1站起来。)
S2: Hi!/Hello! I’m Wang Xiang. (S2站起来。)
S3: Hi!/Hello! I’m Wei Hua. (S3站起来。)
(教师接着对刚刚做过自我介绍的学生进行提问，练习上面板书的另两个句式。)
T: I’m … Are you Wei Hua?
S3: Yes, I am. (学生点头，这时教师引导学生作答。)
T: I’m … Are you Li Feng?
S2: No, I’m not. I’m Wang Xiang.
(让学生两人一组进行类似操练。)
(2)(再找来一名学生S4，教学Nice to meet you. Nice to meet you, too.的情景用法。板书重点句子。)
-Nice to meet you.
-Nice to meet you, too.
(教师示范表演。)
T: Hello! I’m … Are you Liu Siyang?
S4: No, I’m not. I’m Wendy.
T: Oh, nice to meet you, Wendy.
S4: Nice to meet you, too. (教师引导学生作答。)
(让学生互相问答，借此机会运用类似的对话认识同学。)
2. (播放3a录音，让学生跟读，注意模仿语音语调并进行人机对话。完成3a。)
T: Listen to the tape and repeat. Pay attention to the pronunciation and intonation, please. Then practice the dialog with the tape. (教师给以适当汉语提示。)
3. (让学生自由组合操练1a和3a，然后两人一组上讲台表演。进行小组竞赛，巩固1a和3a所学内容。完成3b。)
T: Practice a dialog according to 1a and 3a in pairs, then act it out. (教师给以适当汉语提示。)
S1: Good morning!
S2: Good morning!
S1: I’m … Are you …?
S2: Yes, I am.
S1: Nice to meet you.
S2: Nice to meet you, too.
S1: Welcome to China!
S2: Thanks./Thank you.
4. (再让学生四人一组上台表演打招呼和做自我介绍。)
T: Act out the dialog with your own names.
S3: Hi!
S4: Hi!
S3: I’m … Are you …?
S4: Yes, I am.
S3: Hello! Are you …?
S5: No, I’m not. I’m …
S3: Nice to meet you.
S5: Nice to meet you, too.
S3: Hi! Are you …?
S6: Yes, I am.
S3: Welcome to China!
S6: Thanks./Thank you.
Step 4 Practice 第四步 练习(时间:10分钟)
通过教学读写字母Aa-Gg并做字母接力游戏，培养学生的合作精神，激发学生的学习兴趣。
1. (学习字母Aa-Gg。)
(1)(教师逐个出示字母卡片，先示范字母的读音，要求学生仔细听，认真观察教师的口型，再进行模仿。每个字母都要用升降调来读。)
T: Listen to me and read the letters after me. Learn Aa-Gg by heart.
(教师先教学字母Aa-Gg，然后全体学生跟读Aa ，Bb , Cc , Dd , Ee , Ff , Gg 。)
T: AaBb Cc Dd Ee Ff Gg
Ss: AaBb Cc Dd Ee Ff Gg
(2)(告诉学生，每个英文字母都有印刷体和书写体、大写和小写之分。关于字母的书写，要严格要求学生用四线格的练习本，按笔顺和格式书写。逐个板书英文字母。书写每个字母时，教师要做好示范，从起笔到收笔，用几笔写成的都要示范清楚。带着学生用右食指在空中模仿，然后让学生在四线格上临摹。完成2a。)
T: Now let’s learn how to write the letters.
2. (1)(英语字母接力游戏。)
T: Now let’s play a game.
(由第一排第一个同学快速说出“A”，第二个同学快速接上“B”。依次C，D，E，F，G，A，B……)
T: The first student in the first row says “A” quickly, and the second student says “B” and then other students say C, D, E, F, G, A, B … one by one. (教师给以汉语提示。)
(待上个游戏完成后，再要求第一个同学报出“AB”，第二个同学快速接上“BC”，第三个同学快速接上“CD”……以此类推，直到全班同学都参与进去。)
T: Well done! Now the first one says “AB”, the second one says “BC” quickly, the third one says “CD” and so on. (教师给以汉语提示。)
(2)(两人一组用身体组成任何一个大写字母，并大声说出该字母。)
T: Pair work. Form the capital letters with your bodies and read them aloud.
3. (教师讲解2b的做题方法并示范，让学生听录音，完成2b。)
T: Now let’s listen and circle the letters you hear. Then try to find the rule.
Aa Bb Cc Dd Ee Ff Gg
4. (把标注中的大小写字母放在四线格上相应的大小写字母旁边。做配对练习，让学生自主完成4，最后核对答案。提醒学生，字母是该动物单词的首字母，来引发其兴趣。)
T: Match and write down the letters on the line.
Aa Bb Cc Dd Ee Ff Gg
Step 5 Project 第五步 综合探究活动(时间:8分钟)
通过游戏和小组活动，培养学生的想象力和运用所学语言进行交际的能力。
1. (让学生想象并列举生活中有哪些物体与正在学习的英文字母A-G形状相似。如：板凳腿像A，耳朵像B，残月像C、D等。)
T: Can you imagine and list some objects which have the same shapes with English letters? For example: The legs of bench are like “A”, ears are like “B”, the moon is like “C” or “D”, etc. (教师用汉语给以提示。)
2. (做游戏:字母配对)(Letter Matching)
(1)活动目的：辨别字母的印刷体、书写体及大小写。
(2)活动过程:
①活动准备。教师事先制作一些卡片，每张卡片上写一个英文字母。每个字母分大写、小写、印刷体和书写体，并分别写在四张卡片上。
②做活动时，教师发给每人一张字母卡，规定大家不许出声，只可以看彼此手上拿着的字母卡。教师一声号令，每人开始在全班同学中寻找拿着与自己相同字母的其他三个同学。当拿着同一字母不同字体的四个人最先找在一起，并立刻一同把字母卡交给教师时，他们在这一局中就算获得胜利。
(3)有关说明：
①活动前需向学生展示四种卡片，以便活动时辨认。
②活动卡片数量必须跟学生数量相同，而每个字母有成套的四张卡片。所以在制作卡片时要考虑学生的数量。假设有二十八个人参加游戏，选写七个字母，同一个字母有四张卡片，共制成二十八张字母卡。
③可将每个字母四张卡片改成两张卡片(大写与小写)，这样学生在活动时只需寻找一个同伴。
3. (小组活动。七名学生一组分别取名为Aa-Gg，用学过的打招呼用语和问候语进行对话。)
T: Group work. A group of seven students act as Aa-Gg, greeting each other.
Example:
SA: Hello!
SB: Hello!
SA: Are you Cc?
SB: No, I’m not. I’m Bb.
SA: Nice to meet you.
SB: Nice to meet you, too.
…
4. (教师用投影仪或小黑板展示句子，配对。巩固本课所学句型。)
T: Match the sentences in Column A with those in Column B.
A B
(1)Hi! a.Thanks./Thank you.
(2)Welcome to China! b.Hello!
(3)Nice to meet you. c.Nice to meet you, too.
(4)Good morning! d.Good morning!
(5)Hello! e.Yes, I am.
(6)I’m Kangkang. Are you Michael? f. Hi!
5. Homework:
(1)练习字母Aa-Gg的写法，每个字母写五遍。
(2)练习字母Aa-Gg的读音及本节课所学的问候语。
(3)下课后，给自己取一个英文名字。
板书设计：
Welcome to China!
Section A
1.- Good morning! 5.- Are you Maria?
- Good morning! - No, I’m not. I’m Jane.
2.- Hello! 6.- Nice to meet you.
- Hello! - Nice to meet you, too.
3.- Hi! 7.- Welcome to China.
- Hi! - Thanks./Thank you.
4.- I’m Kangkang. Are you Michael?
- Yes, I am.
Section B
The main activities are 1a, 2a and 3a. 本课重点活动是1a, 2a和3a。
Ⅰ. Teaching aims and demands 教学目标
1. (1) Learn the letters Hh-Nn.
(2) Learn some new words:
Miss, this, is, Mr.=Mister, see, my, mom, teacher, how, do
2. Learn about greetings and introductions:
(1)Miss Wang, this is Michael. Michael, this is Miss Wang.
(2)-Nice to see you.
-Nice to see you, too.
(3)-How do you do?
-How do you do?
Ⅱ. Teaching aids 教具
小黑板/教学挂图/录音机/字母卡片
Ⅲ. Five-finger Teaching Plan 五指教学方案
Step 1 Review 第一步 复习(时间:10分钟)
通过复习字母Aa-Gg和上节课所学功能用语，导入本节课主要功能用语。
1. (让学生做上节课的字母接力游戏，复习字母Aa-Gg。也可以让两位学生在黑板上听写，要求遵守在四线格上书写的规则。特别强调学生在书写时要用手写体。)
2. (教师用小黑板展示上节课所学功能用语，让学生配对。)
T: Match the sentences in Column A with those in Column B.
(教师给以适当汉语提示。)
A B
1.Hello! a.Thanks.
2.Welcome to China! b.Nice to meet you, too.
3.Good morning! c.No, I’m not. I’m Wei Hua.
4.Nice to meet you. d.Hello!
5.Are you Kangkang? e.Good morning!
(核对答案，教师讲解并让学生两人一组练习所学功能用语。)
3. (师生对话，导出新词。)
T: Good morning, S1!
S1: Good morning, …
T: Oh. I’m …, you can call me Mr./Miss … (教师给以汉语提示。)
(教师板书并教学Mr./Miss，要求学生掌握。)
Mr. = Mister
Miss
T: Good morning, boys and girls.
Ss: Good morning, Mr./Miss …
T: Hi, S2! Nice to see you.
S2: Hi, Mr./Miss … Nice to see you, too. (如果学生答错或答不出来，教师给以帮助。)
(板书并教学see，要求学生掌握，并能熟练运用问候语。)
see
-Nice to see you.
-Nice to see you, too.
4. (教师用多媒体出示其他老师的照片做介绍，引出This is … 这一句型。)
T: This is Mr. …/This is Miss …
(板书并教学，要求学生掌握。)
This is …
5. (出示1a教学挂图，导入新课。)
T: Now Kangkang, Michael and Miss Wang meet at the school gate. What are they saying? Do you want to know? Let’s come to 1a together. (教师给以汉语提示。)
Step 2 Presentation 第二步 呈现(时间:8分钟)
在语境中呈现功能用语，让学生三人一组操练、模仿和表演，培养学生的听说技能。
1. (放1a录音，让学生结合挂图了解1a对话的大致内容，必要时可放两遍。)
2. (再放1a录音，让学生跟读并模仿语音语调，然后找两位同学一起表演对话。)
T: Listen to 1a again and repeat, and imitate the pronunciation and intonation. Then practice the dialog with me.
S1: Good morning, Miss Wang!
T: Good morning, S1!
S1: Miss Wang, this is S2. S2, this is Miss Wang.
S2: Nice to meet you.
T: Nice to meet you, too.
3. (让学生三人一组练习1a对话，然后找2~3组同学表演，对表演好的小组给予表扬和鼓励，完成1a。)
T: Please practice 1a in groups, then act it out.
4. (让学生根据1a，介绍自己的新同学给其他同学，完成1b。)
T: Introduce your new classmates to others, using “This is …”. Then make your own conversations according to 1a.
Step 3 Consolidation 第三步 巩固(时间:10分钟)
通过看、听、说，练习目标语言，培养学生综合运用语言的能力。
1. (教师出示3a教学挂图，让学生根据图中情境，猜出How do you do?的意思。)
(板书并教学How do you do?的用法，要求学生掌握。)
-How do you do?
-How do you do?
2. (让学生听3a录音，结合图片理解对话情境。)
3. (再放3a录音，让学生跟读，并模仿语音语调，然后进行人机对话。)
T: Listen to 3a and repeat, and imitate the pronunciation and intonation. Then practice the dialog with the tape.
4. (让学生三人一组，分角色练习3a对话，然后表演，完成3a。)
T: Please practice 3a in groups. Then act it out.
(指导学生根据3a对话，完成3b中的对话，巩固练习重点句式This is …和How do you do?的用法。找几组同学表演所填的对话。)
T: Please complete the conversation in 3b. Then act it out.
5. (学生独立完成4。核对答案。)
T: Read the sentences in 4 and match them.
6. (根据4，学生两两对话，复习重点句型，巩固4。)
T: Practice some dialogs according to 4 in pairs. Please practice after the examples.
Example:
S1: How do you do?
S2: How do you do?
S3: Welcome to Beijing!
S4: Thank you.
S5: Nice to meet you.
S6: Nice to meet you, too.
S7: Are you Jane?
S8: Yes, I am.
S9: Good morning!
S10: Good morning!
…
Step 4 Practice 第四步 练习(时间:10分钟)
通过听、说、读、写等方式教学字母Hh-Nn，做游戏进行巩固，培养学生的合作精神。
1. (做Which one is missing?游戏，复习字母Aa-Gg。)
游戏规则：以小组为单位，人人参与。打乱字母卡片Aa-Gg，并把它们贴在黑板上。每一次故意拿掉一张字母卡片，让学生以最快的速度找出来。给最快的小组加分，直到巩固完字母Aa-Gg，评出优胜组。
T: Now, let’s play a game together: Which one is missing?
…
2. (教学字母Hh-Nn，让学生掌握字母大小写的笔画顺序，完成2a。)
(1)(播放录音，让学生看2a并逐个跟读字母，学习Hh-Nn的发音，直到学生非常熟悉为止。停止播放录音，学生齐读字母Hh-Nn。)
T: Please look at 2a, listen to the tape and repeat, then read together. Later I’ll ask some of you to read these letters by yourselves.
(2)(板书字母Hh-Nn, 教学字母的写法。可参见Section A中教学Aa-Gg的方法。)
T: Please look at the blackboard. Let’s learn how to write these letters.
(3)(利用英文字母卡片，做字母抢答游戏，激发学生学习字母的兴趣。)
(教师举起一张字母卡片Kk；学生迅速说出Kk前面和后面的字母；最先答对的获胜。)
T: Let’s play a game. I’ll show you some letter cards. Then you must say the neighbours of the letters as quickly as you can. The one who says the right letters first is the winner.
3. (写出大写字母的小写形式和小写字母的大写形式，让学生完成2c。)
T: Please rewrite the words using small or capital letters in 2c.
4. (听录音，完成2b。)
T: Listen and circle the letters you hear in 2b. Then try to find the rule.
5. (播放5录音，让学生跟读，鼓励学生说出其中文含义，教师给以适当帮助和补充，完成5。)
T: Listen to the tape and repeat. Then tell me their meanings in Chinese, please.
Step 5 Project 第五步 综合探究活动(时间:7分钟)
通过游戏，培养学生的想象力和合作学习的能力。
1. (明星会：把班里同学分成若干组，每组十人左右，请每位同学各自模仿一位“明星”，开一个聚会。在聚会上，明星相互介绍、问候、交朋友。)
Example:
A: Good morning. I’m Liu Xiang. Are you Yao Ming?
B: Yes, I am. Nice to meet you.
A: Nice to meet you, too.
A: Hi, Li Yong! This is Yao Ming. Yao Ming, this is Li Yong.
…
2. (鼓励学生在各学科教材上找出著名人物，如历史人物、天文学家、地理学家、化学家等，用This is …句型把他们介绍给同学。)
T: Please find out the famous people and introduce them to us.
3. (做字母找朋友游戏。)
(1)教师拿出英语字母卡片，每张卡片上有一个大写字母或小写字母，大小写字母每套十四张。将十四张大写字母的卡片贴在黑板的左边，十四张小写字母的卡片贴在黑板的右边。注意把大写字母和小写字母的顺序打乱。
(2)将学生分成两组，每组选派一个代表到黑板前，把打乱了的英文字母按正确的顺序排列起来，最先正确完成的一组为获胜者。要求学生通过游戏提高辨认字母，熟悉字母顺序的能力。
T: Let’s play another game. Please put the letters in the right order.
4. Homework:
(1)让学生利用各种资源收集缩写字母的含义，并与其他同学一起在课后分享。
(2)把字母Hh-Nn写到练习本上，每个写五遍。
(3)三人一组操练1a、3a对话。
板书设计:
Welcome to China!
Section B
1. This is Mr. … 3. -Mr. Lee, this is my mom.
This is Miss … -Mom, this is my teacher, Mr. Lee.
2. -Nice to see you. 4. -How do you do?
-Nice to see you, too. -How do you do?
Section C
The main activities are 1a and 2a. 本课重点活动是1a和2a。
Ⅰ. Teaching aims and demands 教学目标
1.(1) Learn the letters Oo-Zz.
(2) Learn some new words:
afternoon, fine, goodbye, bye, evening, and, OK
2.Learn about greetings and farewells:
(1)-Good afternoon/evening, Miss Wang!
-Good afternoon/evening, Mr. Lee!
(2)-How are you?
-I’m fine. Thank you. / Fine, thanks. And you?
-I’m OK.
(3)-Goodbye, Mr. Chen.
-Bye.
(4)-See you later, Mr. Lee.
-See you.
Ⅱ. Teaching aids 教具
字母卡片/图片/录音机/字母表挂图/火柴
Ⅲ. Five-finger Teaching Plan 五指教学方案
Step 1 Review 第一步 复习(时间:15分钟)
复习上节课所学字母和功能用语，导入本课的功能用语，创设出宽松自由的课堂氛围。
1. (利用字母卡片，复习字母Aa-Nn。)
T: Let’s review the letters from Aa to Nn with some letter cards.
2. (利用形体表演字母，增加趣味性。)
T: Let’s play a guessing game. First I’ll ask one student to act a letter. Then let the others guess what letter it is.
3. (做字母接龙游戏，使学生熟悉字母顺序。)
T: Please say the letters from Aa to Nn, one says Aa, the next one says Bb. Then Cc… OK?
4. (师生复习打招呼用语和介绍用语。)
T: Good morning, S1.
S1: Good morning, Mr./Miss××.
T: Nice to see you.
S1: Nice to see you, too.
T: S1, this is S2. S2, this is S1.
S1: Nice to meet you.
S2: Nice to meet you, too.
(三人一组进行同样的活动，鼓励学生灵活运用所学的知识。)
5. (头脑风暴。教师快速说出已学过的打招呼用语，学生迅速作出反应，导入How are you?的用法。)
T: Hello!/Hi!
Ss: Hello!/Hi!
T: Good morning!
Ss: Good morning!
(教师利用指针指向下午两点的时钟的简笔画，教学Good afternoon!)
T: It’s 2:00 p.m. now. Good afternoon, class!
Ss: Good afternoon, Miss Wang!
(板书并要求学生掌握。)
Good afternoon!
(用同样方法教学Good evening！)
(板书并要求学生掌握。)
Good evening！
T: Nice to meet you.
Ss: Nice to meet you, too.
T: How are you?
Ss: I’m fine, thank you.(帮助学生回答。)
(板书并要求学生掌握。)
How are you?
I’m fine, thank you.
(教师解释How are you?的意思和用法。链式操练，熟悉该用语。)
(教师面向S3提问。)
T: How are you?
S3: I’m fine, thank you.
(S3面向S4提问。)
S3: How are you?
S4: I’m fine, thank you.(面向S5) How are you?
S5: I’m fine, thank you.(面向S6) How are you?
S6: …
…
(教师引导学生用另一种说法来完成该对话。)
T: How are you?
S7: Fine, thanks. And you?(帮助学生回答。)
T: I’m OK.
(板书并要求学生掌握。)
and, OK
(链式操练该对话。)
6. (教师运用肢体语言。让学生使用英语表达他们所熟悉的情景。)
T: I’ll do some actions, then you say their meanings.
Ss: Good! (教师竖起大拇指。)
Ss: OK! (教师做OK手势。)
Ss: Nice to meet you./How do you do? (教师握住学生的手。)
Ss: Goodbye./Bye./See you later./See you. (教师做再见手势，帮助学生回答。)
(板书并要求学生掌握。)
Goodbye.
Bye.
See you later.
See you.
7. (教师向不同的学生说Goodbye./See you later.，并做相应手势，让学生做相应回答。导入1a。)
T: Now let’s look at the pictures. How do they greet?
Step 2 Presentation 第二步 呈现(时间:6分钟)
在情境中呈现功能用语，并让学生跟读模仿，有利于学生形成正确的语音语调。
1. (出示1a挂图，播放1a录音，让学生观察图中的人物及其手势，理解对话情境。)
2. (再次播放1a录音，让学生跟读并模仿语音语调。)
T: Listen to 1a and repeat. Pay attention to the pronunciation and intonation.
3. (让学生两人一组练习1a。)
T: Now, please read the dialogs in 1a in pairs.
Step 3 Consolidation 第三步 巩固(时间:8分钟)
在真实情境中模仿对话，使学生最终掌握本课功能用语。
1. (出示1a前两幅挂图，师生情景表演：教师站在门外演Xiao Zeng，一名学生在室内演Mr. Chen。)
T: Good afternoon, Mr. Chen!
S1: Good afternoon, Xiao Zeng!
T: How are you?
S1: I’m fine, thank you.
T: Goodbye, Mr. Chen.
S1: Bye.
(出示1a挂图后两幅，让学生模仿表演。角色互换。)
2. (看挂图，创设情景，仿照1a对话。)
T: Well, look at the pictures, then imitate the dialogs.
3. (让学生用自己的真实姓名表演1a，完成1b。)
T: Practice the conversations in 1a with your partner using your own names. Then change partners and practice again.
Step 4 Practice 第四步 练习(时间:8分钟)
教学字母Oo-Zz，以游戏方式进行巩固，培养学生的观察力、想象力和合作精神。
1. (教学字母Oo-Zz。完成2a。)
T: Let’s learn the letters from Oo to Zz in 2a. First, look at 2a and listen to the tape, then read after the tape for three times. At last, read the letters together.
(1)(播放2a录音，让学生看2a字母并跟读，学习Oo-Zz的发音，多听并模仿，直到学生读得准确，自主练习后齐声读。)
(2)(板书字母Oo-Zz，教学字母的写法。可参见Section A中教学Aa-Gg的方法。)
(3)(教师出示一些与Oo-Zz相像的图案，让学生读相应字母，增加感性认识。)
(4)(让学生发挥想象，说出生活中与Oo-Zz字母相像的物体。如：圆圆的月亮像O，高高的T形广告牌像T等。)
T: Can you say something like the letters? For example: the round moon looks like “O”, the advertisement board is like “T”. Can you say some other ones?
2. (巩固英语字母。)
活动步骤：
(1)(把字母表的挂图展示给学生，并特别指出彩色的五个元音字母, 让学生读出来。教师板书A、E、I、O、U，并说明它们是元音字母及其在英语单词中的重要地位。然后让学生一起大声朗读这些字母。)
(2)(每个同学准备好纸笔，听到教师的号令后，立即写出26个字母的大小写，并把元音字母作上标记，把又快又对者评为“当日英语之星”。)
3. (播放2b录音，完成2b。)
T: Now please listen and fill in the blanks in 2b. Then listen again and pay attention to the rule of each group.
4. (小组活动。四人一个小组，利用课前准备好的火柴摆字母，看哪组摆得最多，评出获胜组。完成3。)
T: Please make some letters with your matches after the models in 3 and then read them out.
Step 5 Project 第五步 综合探究活动(时间:8分钟)
通过游戏、简笔画和英文歌曲等形式巩固所学内容，让学生在玩中学，从而激发他们的学习兴趣。
1. (字母游戏：教师把字母卡片分发给每个学生，每个字母的卡片数量相同。教师随意说出某个字母，所有持该字母卡片的学生均须高举卡片，并大声读出该字母。)
2. (找邻居：教师在黑板上画三个以上的小方框，在中间一个方框内填上字母，让学生填出与它相邻的字母。)
3. (这个小丑是由26个英文字母组成的，让我们一起找找看，看谁找得又准又快！)
4. (用简笔画画出人物之间打招呼的不同姿势，让学生观察简笔画，写出相应的招呼用语。)
5. (播放4录音，学唱ABC歌。)
6. Homework:
(1)练习字母Oo-Zz的写法，每个写五遍。
(2)观察Aa-Zz小写字母的写法，把具有相同特征的进行归类：
如：写在第二格的有： 写在第一、二格的有： 写在第二、三格的有：
写在第一、二、三格的有：
板书设计：
Welcome to China!
Section C
1.-How are you? 3.-See you later.
-I’m fine, thank you./Fine, thanks. And you? -See you.
-I’m OK. 4.-Good afternoon/evening!
2.-Goodbye. -Good afternoon/evening!
-Bye. 5. A, E, I, O, U
Section D
The main activities are 1 and 5. 本课重点活动是1和5。
Ⅰ. Teaching aims and demands 教学目标
1. (1)Review greetings:
①Good morning/afternoon/evening!
②Hi!/Hello!
③-How are you?
-I’m fine, thank you./Fine, thanks. And you?
④-How do you do?
-How do you do?
⑤-Nice to meet/see you.
-Nice to meet/see you, too.
⑥-Welcome to China!
-Thanks./Thank you.
(2)Review introductions:
①-I’m … Are you …?
-Yes, I am. / No, I’m not. I’m …
②This is …
(3)Review farewells:
①-See you later.
-See you.
②-Goodbye.
-Bye.
2. Review the letters Aa-Zz.
Ⅱ. Teaching aids 教具
教学挂图/小黑板/字母卡片/录音机
Ⅲ. Five-finger Teaching Plan 五指教学方案
Step 1 Review 第一步 复习(时间:8分钟)
通过复习上节课所学功能用语，创设情境导入新课。
1. (师生互动和生生互动复习上节课所学问候语及告别语，巩固问候语及告别语的英文表达法。)
T: Let’s review greetings and farewells.
T: Hi, class!(教师做挥手打招呼状。)
Ss: Hi, Mr. …/Miss …
T: Nice to meet/see you.(教师做握手状。)
Ss: Nice to meet/see you, too.
T: How are you?
Ss: I’m fine, thank you.
T: See you later./Goodbye.(教师做挥手告别状。)
Ss: See you./Bye.
(让学生两人一组练习问候语和告别语。)
2. (教师出示2中的挂图，让学生观察这几幅图中的情境，并根据情境两人一组做对话练习。)
T: Look at the pictures. Find out how Kangkang greets his teacher, Miss Wang. Then practice the dialog in pairs.
S1: How are you?
S2: I’m fine, thanks.
…
Step 2 Presentation 第二步 呈现(时间:8分钟)
利用2中图片，设置情境，练习对话并表演，让学生熟练运用本课涉及问候和告别的功能用语。
1. (让学生听2录音，完成排序。)
T: Please listen and number the pictures in 2.
2. (根据书上的这几幅图，先师生后生生进行对话操练。练习2。)
T: Let’s make a conversation and perform it.
S1: Good morning, Miss Wang!
T: Good morning, Kangkang!
S1: Nice to see you.
T: Nice to see you, too.
S1: How are you?
T: Fine, thanks.
S1: Goodbye, Miss Wang.
T: Bye.
(让学生两人一组练习2中的对话。)
3. (两人一组表演这个对话，对表演得非常流畅的学生给予掌声鼓励。)
(这是本话题的目标语言，正常情况下要求学生独立完成表演。如果学生不能流畅地表演，教师要给予适当指导。)
Step 3 Consolidation 第三步 巩固(时间:12分钟)
复习归纳本话题主要语法和功能用语，设置“名人会”情景进行对话，培养学生运用所学语言的能力，激发他们的学习兴趣。
1. (利用小黑板出示语法重点里的句子，让学生观察并总结be动词用法。)
T: Look at the blackboard. Let’s review the grammar focus.
I’m Kangkang. I’m=I am
Are you Maria? Yes, I am./No, I’m not.
Miss Wang, this is Michael.
(根据总结的规律，模仿句型造句。完成4a。)
2. (小组竞赛。让学生四人一组找出本话题有用的表达，在规定时间内，哪组找得最快最准确，哪组获胜。评出优胜组。完成4b。)
T: Let’s review these useful expressions.
Good morning/afternoon/evening! Good morning/afternoon/evening!
Welcome to China! Thank you./Thanks.
Hello!/Hi! Hello!/Hi!
Nice to meet/see you. Nice to meet/see you, too.
How do you do? How do you do?
How are you ? I’m fine, thank you./Fine, thanks.
Goodbye. Bye.
See you later. See you.
(让学生分组练习这些有用表达，并要求掌握。)
3. (让学生各自模仿一位“名人”，进行一次“名人会”。会上“名人”互相介绍认识，复习本话题的主要功能用语和语法句。)
T: Now suppose you all are the famous persons, use your new names to introduce yourselves, get to know others, and make an introduction to your friends. For example:
S1: Hello, I’m Zhou Yu. Are you Zhuge Liang(诸葛亮)?
S2: Yes, I am. Nice to meet you.
S1: Nice to meet you, too.
S2: Hi, Liu Bei. How are you?
S3: I’m fine. Thank you. And you?
S2: I’m OK. Zhou Yu, this is my friend Liu Bei. Liu Bei, this is Zhou Yu.
S3: How do you do?
S1: How do you do?
(小组活动。三人一组，限定时间，在规定时间内能够完成表演的组合，给予掌声鼓励。)
Step 4 Practice 第四步 练习(时间:10分钟)
复习26个字母，并按发音进行分类，培养学生的归纳能力和合作精神。
1. (复习字母Aa-Zz。)
T: Let’s recite English letters together. OK?
Ss: OK.
T: One, two, three, go!
Ss: Aa Bb Cc … Zz
2. (让学生将字母按相同音素分类。教师板书归类后的字母，并要求掌握。)
T: Well done! Now can you find out the letters with the same vowel phoneme?
Aa Hh Jj Kk
Ee Bb Cc Dd Gg Pp Tt Vv Zz
Ii Yy
Ff Ll Mm Nn Ss Xx
Uu Qq Ww
Oo
Rr
(教师引导学生找出这些字母之间潜在的发音规律。注意Oo和Rr是单个的。)
3. (教师先让学生理解教材1中的图片，然后播放录音，完成1。)
T: Listen to the tape and finish 1.
4. (让学生看3中的缩写词，尽可能多地说出中文意思，说不出的教师补充。播放3的录音，学生跟读。让学生小组讨论他们还知道哪些缩写词，和同学一起分享。)
Step 5 Project 第五步 综合探究活动(时间:7分钟)
通过游戏和制作名片进行操练，复习巩固本话题所学要点，培养学生综合运用所学语言的能力和合作精神。
1. (组织学生做下列字母游戏，检查学生对字母的掌握情况。)
T: Let’s play a game with the English letter cards.
(1)拿出字母卡片，大写一套，小写一套，男女学生各派一名代表上讲台，教师给男生大写字母卡片，给女生小写字母卡片，然后发出下列号令，最先完成的为获胜者，另一方应为获胜者鼓掌。本游戏男女生可轮换进行，每轮评比一次。
①把字母表中的五个元音字母按顺序贴在黑板上。
②把字母表中的第十二，十三个字母贴在黑板上。
③把Gg和Qq两个字母后面的第三个字母贴在黑板上。
(2)拿出字母卡片，按发音规律给二十六个字母归类。男女学生各两名，黑板中间画竖线,一分为二，男左女右。教师做出如下提示：①// ②// ③// ④// ⑤// ⑥Don’t forget// and //。学生按教师的提示把手中的字母按顺序贴在黑板上，最先完成的为获胜者。
2. (教会学生制作英文名字的名片，完成5。)
T: Let’s learn how to make an English name card.
(1)检查学生是否都有英文名字,没有的,帮助他们起一个,挑选几个英文名字,告诉学生英文名字的含义。
(2)教学生动手做名片，一面写中文名字，一面写英文名字。
(3)学生拿着名片在同学间穿梭，交朋友，互换名片。
(4)学生把所交换的名片按字母顺序排列。
(5)学生把所交换的名片分成两组：男生名字和女生名字。
(6)教师画简笔画，让学生模仿此情景，进行对话，一边握手，一边交换名片，用所复习的句型设计对话内容。可三人一组进行操练。
T: Act out a conversation according to the information on your card.
Example:
S1=Kangkang S2=Jane S3=Li Ming
S1: Hello! I’m Kangkang. Are you Jane?
S2: Yes, I am.
S1: Nice to meet you.
S2: Nice to meet you, too.
S1: Hi! Li Ming. This is Jane. Jane, this is Li Ming.
S2: How do you do?
S3: How do you do?
S1& S3: Welcome to China!
S2: Thank you.
S1& S3: Goodbye, Jane.
S2: Bye.
3. Homework:
(1)默写26个英文字母(大小写)。
(2)设计一个问候和告别的对话。
(3)让学生自带照片，以备下节课使用。
板书设计：
Welcome to China!
Section D
1.Aa Hh Jj Kk 3.Miss Wang, this is Michael.
Ee Bb Cc Dd Gg Pp Tt Vv Zz 4.-Good morning/afternoon!
Ii Yy -Good morning/afternoon!
Ff Ll Mm Nn Ss Xx 5.-Nice to meet/see you.
Uu Qq Ww -Nice to meet/see you, too.
Oo 6.-How are you?
Rr -I’m fine, thank you./ Fine, thanks.
2.-Are you Maria? 7.-See you later.
-Yes, I am./No, I’m not. -See you.
仁爱七年级英语教案 篇7
秋初三年英语公开课教案
课题《Review Unit One Topic 2》
教学重点与难点：
1. 本单元重要的语言点
2. 现在完成时
教学过程:
1. Read the words
2. Listen to the tape
3. The important language points :
(1) Call sb call sb up give sb a ring telephone sb
(2) Be in / be at home
(3) Not … any more / not … any longer / no longer
(4) Because / because of
(5) Get lost / be lost
(6) Fin d / look for
(7) Each other / one another
(8) Hate doing / hate to do
(9) On the phone / radio
(10) Do some shopping / washing / cleaning
(11) What’s the population of China ? It’s 1.3 billion
Have a population of + 数字 large / small
(12) Increase by 增长了 increase to 增加到
(13) Developed / developing countries
(14) So it is .
(15) Carry out . the one – child policy
(16) More than / over
(17) Half of …..的一半
分数表达: one fifth two fifths a quarter a half
(18) Because / because of / thanks to
(19) Find jobs / get jobs
(20) Satisfy sb / be satisfied with
(21) So far 迄今为止
(22) Take measures to do sth
(23) Work well in doing 做某事取得成效
(24) Have fun doing sth
(25) Such as +并列名词 for example / instance , +从句
4. 现在完成时：(二)
(1)和for , since 引导的短语、从句连用
(2)和already / yet / never / ever / just / before / so far
5.Homework :
Exercise :
完成下列句子：
1. Could you tell me some ____________(有趣的) places around here ?
2. The population in developing ___________(国家)is growing faster .
3. China has already _____________(执行)the one – child policy .
4. ___________(多亏于) the policy , China is developing quickly .
5. Have you found him _________(已经)？
6. I have __________(never /ever )been there before . I want to go there again .
7. I _______________(have lived / lived) since I was three .
8. China has the ____________(larger / largest ) population in the world .
9. We still have a long way __________(to go / going )
10. Natural _____________(environments / environment) are becoming worse and worse .
仁爱七年级英语教案 篇8
教材分析
(一).本节内容在教材中的地位与作用
本节是单元第一课时，通过观察多张照片，对其中人物所做事情的讨论，锻炼学生的观察能力及表达能力，通过进一步的游戏环节，拓展新的学习内容，体现了英语教育的趣味性和实用性。
(二).教学目标:
知识目标
1．掌握现在进行时的运用和表达的意思，关注人称和动词的搭配。
2．句型What are you doing?I’m doing sth..What is he/she doing?He/she is doing sth..Is he/she doing sth.?Yes,he/she is.或No,he/she isn’t.3.掌握肯定句和一般疑问句的句型转换及其回答。
4.掌握各种描述动作的词组。
能力目标
1.培养学生学以致用的能力，养成良好的观察能力。
2.培养学生主动参与学习，善于与他人合作学习的能力。
3.提高学生听说读写的能力。
情感目标
培养学生热爱学习，热爱劳动，热爱生活，珍惜生命的积极的人生观。
(三).教学重点、难点
教学重点：What are you doing?I’m doing sth..What is he/she doing?He/she is doing sth..Is he/she doing sth.?Yes,he/she is.或No,he/she isn’t.教学难点：用be doing来表示说话的瞬间正在做某事。
采用让学生动手操作、合作探究、媒体演示的教学方法来突出重点、突破难点。
（四）.教具、学具准备（准备好以下相关的教具、学具）
1.教具:多媒体课件。
2.学具:笔、课堂练习本
教法选择与学法指导
本节课主要是对于正在发生的事情进行讨论，先利用欣赏电影片段吸引学生的注意力，教育学生要热爱生活，再利用观看照片来讨论某一瞬间发生的事情。并在课堂教学中将尽量为学生提供参与活动的场景，用任务型教学法让学生进行小组学习，抓住英语交际的机会，感知体验，大胆实践，使学生自得知识、自寻方法、自觅规律、自悟道理。
教学过程设计
Step 1.warm-up
1.Greeting :
Teacher: Hello, everyone.How are you? Today is a nice day, isn’t it?So what do you want to do? And why?点一个举手的学生回答，再面向全班: I like watching TV at home.Because it’s relaxing.Do you want to watch TV?得到肯定回答后，T：Now let’s go to watch TV.进入幻3，点击右下角的铃铛播放电影《泰坦尼克》结尾片段。看完后，T：Do you know its name? Do you like it? Why?学生回答后，老师显示字幕：Don’t let your life.设计目的：通过观看著名的电影片段来吸引学生的注意力，向学生灌输热爱生活珍惜生命的情感教育。
Step2.导入
1、T:I have some photos.展示幻4的照片：Look!This is my life.I’mdoing some things at home.用红外线灯照射每张照片，学生可以通过照片明白句子的意思。老师指着每张照片带读句子(同时做出相应的动作)：I’m watching TV/cleaning/reading/talking on the phone/playing computer games/teaching.认读完最后一张自己上课的照片后，T: what’s my job?...yes,I’m a teacher.然后老师设计打电话的场景：hello, thisisMiss is a nice day.I’m watching TV at home.What about you?进行师生间的对话，起示范作用，让学生能仿造使用幻灯片上的句子回答，并对能使用其他动作回答的同学予以奖励。每个be doing形式都用红色标注，提示学生注意。
设计目的：通过展示老师自己的照片吸引学生的注意，输出新知识，用带读和创设情境的对话形式，让学生初步理解并能表达自己正在做某事。
Step 3:教授新课
展示幻5，T：now，let’s look at other photos.Who is in these photos?老师问几个举手的学生：what are you doing?然后让学生仿照进行pairwork活动:Can you ask your friend ‘what are you doing’?并请几组进行演示，每组演示之后，老师问大家：what is…doing?借机转换人称。
设计目的：创情设景，用学生自己的schoollife照片让大家有话可说，并可借机转换人称，转入下一环节。
展示幻6，T：now，we are in a happy apartment.These people are doing some things.Let’s listen to the conversation.Then tell me: What are these people doing?听完录音后，T ask S1:what is Jenny doing? S1: she is watching TV.T点击屏幕检验。T转向S2：Can you ask your friend about Dave and Mary？然后用以上问句依次请几组同学对图中人物内容进行问答。
设计目的：充分挖掘听力材料，利用其锻炼学生们的听说能力，并成功实现转换人称的问答，使学生能了解并掌握如何询问其他人正在做什么及其回答。
Step 4:合作学习
展示幻7，T：now，let’s make a survey in your group.What are your friends doing now? I’ll give you 3 minutes.You can ask 4 friends, and write down on the chart, then make a report.3分钟之后,T: Can you make a report?请每组派一代表汇报，并进行奖励,T可以插入问句：what is … doing ?。
设计目的：通过小组活动培养学生的合作学习能力和认真聆听他人的良好习惯。
Step 5:拓展新知
1、展示幻8，T：Look!Tom is doing something.Do you know, what is Tom doing?Oh, let me guess.Is Tom writing? S: No, he isn’t.T继续猜，直到S说Yes, he is.为止。点击可检验答案。再点击出现下一个人物。重复以上老师猜，学生答的活动。
设计目的：因为此片内容是书上有的，学生知道谜底，所以由老师做示范来猜，学生回答，锻炼学生认真听的习惯。
2、展示幻9，T：Now, It’our fun time.Do you know this cat? What’s his name? S:...T: yes, he’s Tom.Now,Let’s talk about these pictures.You can ask your friends in your group,what is Tom doing?3 students as a group.And One ask, the others answer.每组发一份图片进行组内讨论。份图片进行组内讨论。3分钟后请几组学生演示，T:You can ask 2 questions.3人一组，一人用红灯照射图片问，另两人答，奖励表现良好的小组。
设计目的：在重温对话what is he doing?的同时，了解各图的内容，为下一环节做铺垫。
3、点击出现幻10和问句Is Tom sleeping?T: Now, What is Tom doing? Is Tom sleeping?(T做睡觉的动作)全班看着图片齐答:Yes, he is.或No, he isn’t.T:Who wants to guess the next picture?请一个学生上台来背对屏幕玩猜谜游戏：示意全班问他：What is Tom doing?此学生边做动作边猜测：Is Tom drinking?全班齐答Yes,he is.或No,he isn’t.猜到者有奖。
设计目的：在游戏中学，在快乐中锻炼听说能力，避免了枯燥的教与学。
Step 6:语法总结
请一个学生对于此课所学进行总结，老师给予及时的评论，并点击进入幻11展示语法小结：现在进行时态。
设计目的：初一的内容是基础教学，语法在最后有必要呈现出来，让大家知道所学内容的专业术语。让学生自己总结更能加深印象。
仁爱七年级英语教案 篇9
Unit1Myname’sGina.
一、教师寄语:
Athousand-lijourneyisstartedbytakingthefirststep.千里之行，始于足下。
二、学习目标：
Keywords：mynamenicemeetyouwhat’shisher
Keyphrases:myname,firstname,lastname,answerthequestion.
What’shisname?
What’shername?及回答。
1.掌握简单的问候语，并能自我介绍，初步培养用英语进行交际的能力。
2.掌握听的技能，在听的过程中准确获取数字信息。
1.name_________2.好的，令人愉快的______________
3.too___________4.遇见______5.your____________
①.onenum.1,一：Oneandtwomakesthree.一加二等于三。
adj.①一个：Ihaveonebook.我有一本书。②有一(天)：Onedayhewillunderstandyou.有一天他会理解你的。
【记忆法】-ee-双写，与meat为同音词。
【考点】tomeetsb.(orsth.)遇到某人/某事：Nicetomeetyou.初次见面时的客套话，不是初次见面时则用see。
③“What’syourname?”“MynameisGina.”“你叫什么名字?”“我叫吉娜。”
两人初次见面互相询问姓名时可用这个句型。如想反问时可说：Andyou?或者Andwhat’syourname?如：
A：Hello.What’syourname?
B：MynameisAnnRead.Andyou?/Andwhat’syourname?
④Hello!你好!
Hello一般可作为熟人、朋友、青年人之间的招呼用语，语气较随便，译为“您好”;此外打电话或遇熟人时也可用。译为“喂”。在表示问候或唤起注意时，有时可用Hi来代替Hello，显得更为随便。如：
动词be就是我们所学过的am,is,are的动词原形。如何使用这三种形式主要取决于主语。当主语是第一人称I(我)时，用am,缩写为I’m;主语是第二人称you(你)或复数时，用are,缩写为you’re，主语是第三人称it/she/he(它/她/他)或名词及代词的单数时，用is,缩写为it’s/she’s/he’s。如：
Iam(I’m)LiuYing.我是刘英。
Youare(You’re)LinTao.你是林涛。
下面介绍一则口诀，帮你熟记“动词be的构成”：
我(I)用am,你(you)用are，is连着他(he)，她(she)，它(it)。
单数名词用is，复数名词全用are。
变否定，更容易，be后not加上去。
变疑问，往前提，句末问号莫丢弃。
(1)hello与hi可以互换，都表示“喂，你好”。但hi比hello用得更多，显得更随和亲近，它尤被美国年轻人所使用。但打电话时常用hello而少用hi。熟人、朋友见面时，彼此问候仅仅说声Hi!就可以了。用hello时，不能“Hello,hello,hello”这样反复使用。
(2)要注意hello/hi一般不用于与师长、上级、年长者以及有体面的人打招呼，以免显得对长辈不够尊重。
③Do1CPracticetheconversation。
在英语中如何拼写中国人的姓名，联合国教科文组织已做规定“一律按汉语拼音的写法。姓和名分开，姓在前，名在后”。现举例说明：
(1)如果是单姓，名又是单字，则姓与名的第一个字母要大写，其余字母用小写。如：LiLei李雷。
(2)如果是单姓，名是双字，则姓的第一个字母大写，名的第一个字母大写，名的双字合在一起算一个词，不得分开。如：HanMeimei韩梅梅。
(3)如果是复姓，则把复姓字母连在一起，只是第一个字母大写，名字的拼写方法同上。如：SimaZhao司马昭，OuyangYunsong欧阳云松。
中英姓名比较──中文姓名是姓在前，名在后;英文姓名是姓在后，名在前。Mr用于姓前，如MrGreen不能说成MrJim.
(4)如果名字里有可能造成音的混淆的拼写时，要用连字号“-”或隔音号“’”隔开。如：
YangXi-an(Xi’an)杨西安，如写成YangXian就成了杨仙。
(1)Goodmorning!/Goodafternoon!/Goodevening!分别用于上午、下午、晚上见面问好。
(2)Hello!/Hi!用于朋友或熟悉的人之间相互打招呼。
(3)Nicetomeet/seeyou.该句答语常用Nicetomeet/seeyou,too.
(1)英语口语中多用省略句，如Goodmorning!也可以直接说Morning!
(2)相互熟悉的人见面打招呼用Howareyou?，初次见面一般用Howdoyoudo?
(3)和外国人打招呼时，不要用中国式的问候语，如：你吃饭了吗?你上哪儿去?
(4)Howareyou?原用于询问对方身体状况，现在逐渐失去原来的涵义，成为日常生活中的寒暄用语。
(1)Iam…我是……
(2)Mynameis…我的名字是……
(3)如果询问对方名字，可以问：What’syourname?/MayIhaveyourname?
(1)如果见了长辈或年龄比自己大的人，用Mr.,Miss,Mrs.等称谓词+familyname(姓氏)。
(2)相互熟悉的同龄人之间可以直呼其名。
Bobby是个粗心的孩子，他写完作业不小心将墨水瓶打翻了。有的地方被墨水弄脏了，看不清了。
5.____________this?It'sabook.(what)
1.What'syourname?____________nameisJenny.
2.I'mHardy.____________tomeetyou.
3.Isthisyourbrother?What's____________name?
4.MaryKingis____________newteacher.
5.Hi!Thisis____________newteacher;____________nameisYangyan.
【例1】—yourname,please?—Mynameis.
A.What’s,JimGreenB.Who’s,JimGreen
C.What’s,GreenJimD.Who’s,GreenJim
精析What’syourname,please?询问对方的姓名，回答时用Mynameis…英语国家人的姓名结构顺序为：名+姓，故选A。答案A
【例2】—Hello!—!
精析Hello!与Goodmorning!都是问候语，它们的答语就是其本身，故选B。如：
—Goodmorning,Joan.琼，早上好!
—Goodmorning,WenBo.闻博，早上好!
【例3】Youateacher.Iastudent.Mysisterastudent,too.
A.am;is;areB.is;are;amC.are;am;isD.are;is;is
精析动词be在一般现在时中根据不同的人称有不同的形式，在本题中，You与are连用，I与am连用，Mysister为第三人称单数，应与is连用。答案C
Mike:Nicetomeetyou.LiLei：Nicetomeetyou,too.
(2)MissKing：That’sanicedress.Ann：.
精析(1)某种情况把迈克和李磊聚到一起，他们意识到双方必须相互了解，相互做自我介绍。因此气氛比较随便，自报姓名往往是为了打听对方姓名的一种策略。对别人自报姓名所做出的回答一般是自报自己的姓名。
(2)在西方国家，当有人赞美你时，要说谢谢，而不像中国人习惯在别人赞美你时要表示谦虚。
【例5】用动词be的适当形式填空。
(1)IinRow6.
(2)Whatyourname?
(3)youten?
精析本题考查的是系动词be的用法。系动词be(是)，随着主语的人称和数的不同，又分为am,is,are三种不同的形式。Am用于第一人称单数;is用于第三人称单数;are用于第二人称单、复数和第一、三人称复数形式。如：Iam…;Itis…;Youare…。下面这则口诀可帮助记忆：我(I)用am，你(You)用are，is跟着他、她、它，一切复数都用are。答案(1)am(2)is(3)Are
1.SheisastudentandnameisKate.
2.ThisisMissGao.Sheyournewteacher.
七、课后反思：
我的收获：____________________________________________
_______________________________________________________
我的不足：________________________________________________
我努力的方向是____________________________________________
仁爱七年级英语教案 篇10
一、概述
本课是义务教育课程标准实验教科书北京仁爱八年级上册Unit 2, Topic 2, Section A内容，所需课时为一课时；新单词有cause,health,tonight,sleepy,medicine,fingernail,meal,without,主要句型有Is……good or bad for your health? Doing …… is good/bad ……. 本课主要联系学生日常生活，以上一话题所学的表生病就医、描述身体不适以及表建议的一些句型等为基础，通过discussion,listening,making dialogues,picture talking等多种活动使学生复习旧知，联系新知，延伸话题内容，能使用两两对话完成一个较简单的话题，提高学生的语言交际能力，并有利于学生养成健康的生活习惯。
二、教学目标分析
从知识与技能、过程与方法、情感态度与价值观三个维度对该课题预计达到的教学目标作出一个整体描述。
1. 知识与技能
（1）认读七个新单词和两个新句型，做到发音准确、清晰；
（2）熟练运用新句型与同桌进行相互问答；
（3）能够借助key points进行看图问答或综合说话；
2．过程与方法
（1）能够通过师生说、两两说和自主听读体验交际式英语教学的一般过程，掌握英语说、听的基本方法；
（2）能够通过两两说和综合说体验合作学习的过程和方法；
（3）能够仔细倾听老师和同学的发言，有语言表达和与同学交流的愿望。
3．情感态度与价值观
（1）激发和保持学生英语学习的动机，实现“趣能”两得；
（2）在学生两两交流和小组合作交流中，培养孩子合作意识和合作精神，能够相互配合完成一段通顺流畅的说话训练
（3）通过本课的学习，有利于树立科学的健康观，养成健康的生活方式。
三、学习者特征分析
1. 学生是漳浦第三中学八年级的学生
2. 学生在上一个话题中已经掌握表述身体的种种不适、“生病”与“看病”的基本句型。
3. 学生已经学会使用should/shouldn’t/had better/had better not 表达建议和劝告的句型。
4. 八年级的学生比较活泼、乐于发言，宽松、活泼的课堂气氛有利于展开小组讨论、情景对话等。
5. 学生整体水平较低，词汇量较差，要设计易于学生开口的情景，预测学生可能使用的单词、短语并呈现出来以供参考。以师生、学生两两对话示范以带动“说”的氛围、激发学生的表达欲望。
四、教学策略选择与设计
本课旨在让学生学会表述身体不适、生病的原因以及形成健康生活的观念。
小组讨论策略：通过讨论，辨别何谓健康的生活方式、卫生习惯，熟悉相关的词汇，为下一步听、说奠定基础；
师生示范策略：让学生明白对话的内容和形式，激发学生的表现、表演欲望；
歌曲激趣策略：通过学生的chant、sing a song，有利于形成宽松活泼的课堂氛围，同时借助chant和歌曲来培养学生良好的个人卫生习惯及健康生活观念。
五、教学资源与工具设计
1．本课教材；
2．拓展资源：教师教学用书八年级上册
3．教学环境：多媒体、VCD、幻灯片、Flash动画、录音机。
六、教学过程
Step1：Warm up
1. Greetings（师生问候）；
2．Sing a song（多媒体播放Chant课件，让学生听、说、做、演进行律动，活跃气氛，营造一个良好的学习英语的氛围）Wash your hands, have a bath. Open the window, take a fresh breath …….
3. Leading-in : (T) In our daily life, there are some good living habits and bad living habits. Good living habits can make a man healthy, wealthy and wise.
Now let’s look at 3a and discuss whether it’s good or not . After discussion,
make dialogues after the example using the sentence pattern “ Is doing …… good or bad for your health?” Do 3a.
例如： A: Is going to bed early good or bad for our health?
B: It’s good..
Going to bed early is good for your health..
( 注意选择疑问句回答时不能用Yes或 No，而要作出具体回答。朗读时or前用升调，or 后面用降调，句末用问号。强调动词或动词短语不能做主语，但可以在动词后面加上ing变成动名词或动名词短语，其作主语时，谓语动词用单数。)
*请学生例举生活中还有哪些是好的或不好的个人卫生习惯。
4. 语法归纳：选择疑问句句型
【句型一】一般疑问句 + 一个供选择的对象 + or + 另一个供选择的对象？
Are you from America or Australia? 你是来自美国还是澳大利亚？
Will you give us a talk, or Jim? 是你给我们做演讲，还是吉姆？
句型二】特殊疑问句 + 一个供选择的对象 + or + 另一个供选择的对象？
Which do you prefer, tea or milk? 你喜欢喝茶还是喝牛奶？
Who teaches you English, Miss Li or Miss Wang? 谁教你们英语，是李老师还是王老师？
5. 根据图片内容两两对话。
Step 2 : Presentation
(1) 教师用多媒体播放1a图片，请学生预测对话内容：
T: What’s wrong with Kangkang?
Ss: He has a headache.
T: What caused it?
Ss: He stayed up late watching TV .
T: Is staying up late good or bad for his health?
Ss: It’s bad.
T: What should he do?
Ss: He should have a good rest.
(2) 播放1a录音，让学生跟读并模仿语音语调。
（3）鼓励学生练习并两两表演1a对话。掌握句型：
Is staying up late good or bad for his health?
Staying up late is bad for your health.
I must have a good rest tonight.
(4) 让学生再读1a，提供关键词，以短文形式复述康康困倦的原因并给出建议。如：
Kangkang feels tired today, because he watched a soccer game on TV last night and went to bed very late. Staying up late is bad for his health. He should go to bed early and have a good rest.
Step3. Consolidation:
1.教师用多媒体呈现各种表情的图片，提供关键词，让学生两人一组练习1b，完成1b.
Ex. :
A: I feel sleepy because I went to bed very late last night..
B: Oh, staying up late is bad for your health. You should……
2. 听2 录音，完成2，核对答案。学习并掌握单词medicine; 再听录音，复述Wang Junfeng应该做什么。
Now listen to the tape and find out whether Wang Junfeng’s habits are good or not. Do listening exercise. Check what Wang Junfeng did and what he should do.
Step 4 : Practice
.1.- Do you go to school by bike or ____ ?
- I go to school ________ .
2. – Would you like apples or ________ ?
- I’d like _______ .
3.- Is Jim in the classroom or ___________________? (在操场）
.4. Who _____________________________ ?(谁今天早上没来上学，汤姆还是吉姆？）
5. _____________________（打篮球）is a good sport.
6. Swimming in the river with no others ____ dangerous.
7. Eating too little or much _____________________. (对健康不好）
8. _________________________（吃一顿丰富的早餐）can keep you energetic all the morning.
9. ________________ (熬夜）makes him feel sleepy.
10. If you don’t feel well , __________________________________. (你最好去看医生）
Step 5: Homework
以How to keep healthy? 为题目，联系本课所学内容，形成一篇80个字左右的小短文。
七年级英语教案精品
在给学生上课之前老师早早准备好教案课件，因此老师最好能认真写好每个教案课件。设计教案需要注重对学生的关爱和支持，应该从什么角度去写教案课件呢？推荐一篇有关“七年级英语教案”的文章希望能够给大家带来启示，本文内容愿为您提供一些有益的帮助！
七年级英语教案【篇1】
单词水平测试七
班级 ______________ 姓名 ______________ 分数 ______________
1. French is one of the o _______________ languages in Canada.
2. If you taste the sea water, you’ll find it s _______________.
3. He has broken the agreement by not doing the work he p _______________.
4. I know you are very busy, but if you can m _______________ to come on Saturday afternoon, I shall be very thankful.
5. A good p _______________ is very important for a teacher of English who teaches small children.
6. A national conference will be held next _______________ (周三) to discuss the economic problems.
7. The hostess takes pride in careful _______________ (准备) of special dishes.
8. While they were away from home, they put all their valuable in the bank, just for _______________ (安全).
9. Mr. Smith turns lawyer but Mr. Brown _______________ (仍然) a worker.
10. Susan is talkative, but she never talks to _______________ (陌生人) .
11. I can’t go to the party, but I’m going to have some flowers d _______________ for her birthday.
12. The picture shows four g _______________, great grandfather, grandfather, parents and baby.
13. My English teacher always e _______________ me when I meet with difficulties.
14. The c _______________ made me worn out when I reached the top of the mountain.
15. I’ll have to buy a pair of t _______________ to match my new T-shirt.
16. Robin is a cold-blooded killer; he has _______________ (谋杀) a lot of people.
17. The worst part of the divorce was the _______________ (分离) from his three children. He wanted to be with them.
18. The show had a very large audience, _______________ (范围) from children to grandparents.
19. Do you think the teaching in _______________ (私人的) schools is better than in state schools?
20. Your plan sounds good, and it you raise the plan at the meeting I’ll _______________ (支持) you.
单词水平测试八
班级 ______________ 姓名 ______________ 分数 ______________
1. My brother enjoys c _______________ stamps.
2. You seem to have a fever. Let me take your t _______________.
3. The air around the earth is called a _______________.
4. What he said e _______________ me greatly and I made up my mind to continue learning.
5. The manager can speak several f _______________ languages.
6. Dreams are just _______________ (记忆) to be.
7. Nowadays most people use paper _______________ (手帕) .
8. Nie Haishen and Fei Jun long have become _______________ (熟悉的) faces to millions of fans of space travel.
9. Not surprisingly, praise usually makes children _______________ (提高) greatly.
10. The boy spoke in a very low voice _______________ (承认) he had broken the glass.
11. When a soldier meets an officer, the soldier often s _______________ him.
12. When the crops are r _______________, they are ready to be harvested.
13. The fridge does not f _______________ very well; you’d better get it repaired.
14. I know you are very busy. Would you mind s _______________ me a few minutes?
15. A bicycle is far more c _______________ than a car or a bus in busy cities.
16. The car accident has caused _______________ damage to Mary’s eyesight; she will not be able to see things for the rest of her life.
17. Hand _______________ () is the small bags that you carry with you when you are traveling on a plane.
18. The boy was happy to see many colorful _______________ () go up into the sky.
19. Although the painting looked old, it’s really a _______________ ().
20. One of his _______________ () is to become the CEO of the international company.
Key
单词水平测试七
1. official 2. salty 3. promised 4. manage 5. pronunciation 6. Wednesday 7. preparation 8. safety 9. remains 10. strangers 11. delivered 12. generations 13. encourages 14. climbing 15. trousers 16. murdered 17. separation 18. ranging 19. private 20. support
单词水平测试八
1. collecting 2. temperature 3. atmosphere 4. encouraged 5. foreign 6. memories 7. handkerchiefs 8. familiar 9. improve 10. admitting 11. salutes 12. ripe 13. function 14. sparing 15. convenient 16. permanent 17. luggage 18. balloons 19. fake 20. ambitions
七年级英语教案【篇2】
No. 110 Middle School of Chongqing By Cao Yi
Unit 6 Where are the jazz CDs？
单元整体说明
单元教材分析
本单元的核心内容是用英语问路及谈论爱好，因此本单元的主要交际功能项目为“asking for and giving directions”and“talking about favorites，’本单元通过在音乐节Music Festivals）上问路，让学生在问路与指路的同时，又掌握了本单元中出现的音乐名词（Names of musical styles, such as jazz, pop, country）。在Section A中的3 ,4和1a,lb,2a,2b,2c为谈论自己的爱好，学生可当堂表演。
单元知识结构
词汇
名词：jazz, pop, country，dance, video, floor，！！section, group，singer, sound，fan，are, direction, culture, palace, hall, painting, gate
形容词: classical, traditional, amazing, awful, bad, western
副词： upstairs
词组：not bad，and so on
句型：
1 Where’s the pop music?
Go upstairs and turn right．It's next to the jazz.
2 What's your favorite kind of music, Judy?
My favorite kind of music is...
语法：
1. Where are the jazz CDs?
Go upstairs /Go straight and turn right /left．
They are between the pop and the country
2 The use of the sentences structures．
单元整体目标
1．Master the vocabulary．
2．Master and use：Where are the country CDs？
Go upstairs /Go straight and turn right /left.
They are between …and …／next to… behind …
单元教学重难点一览
重点 难点
I The vocabulary．
2 The Grammar． 1 Asking for and giving directions.
2 Talking about favorite.
单元学情分析
本单元与前几个单元的学习自然衔接，继续学习询问和指点方向，而且与学生愿意接触的“音乐“有关，很大程度上能调动学生的学习积极性。
单元教学建议
听、说、读、写全面训练，在说写的基础上，充分借助听力材料和补充阅读材料，训练学生的听力阅读水平。
a口语训练：本单元的口语活动主要是询问和指点方向及谈论爱好，教学时可以将学生分组设置情景〔例如问学校里的某个地方，最喜欢的歌等）展开训练。
b阅读训练：教师要求学生在阅读完SelfCheck中的3后，除了可以在地图上找出正确的地点外，还要培养学生猜测个别生词词义的能力。
c写的训练：写是检查学生英语水平的重要手段，写的训练要在听、说、读训练的基础上进行，任务型的写的训练有助于培养学生综合运用英语解决实际问题的能力。设计如“目标调查”这样的练习，把听、说、读与写的训练结合起来。
第一步，要求学生写几句话，谈谈他们喜欢的歌曲类型，歌手及歌曲。例如：
My favorite kind of music is country, and The Smith Family is my favorite group …
第二步，小组活动。
1提问：一个学生向另一个学生提问，了解对方的爱好。例如：
A：What’s your favorite kind of music?
B：My favorite kind of music is country.
A：Who’s your favorite country group?
B：My favorite group is The Smith Family.
A：……
2朗读：学生朗读自己的爱好。
单元课时分配
本单元4课时：
Section A（一）1课时
Section A（二）1课时
Section B（一）1课时
Section B（二）1课时
Section A（一）
教学内容
Section A中la．lb．lc．2a．2b．2c Grammar focus
教学目标
知识与能力
1、Match the vocabulary: jazz，classical，dance, pop，country, upstairs，video，floor, section,
2、Master and use：Where’s the jazz music？
Go straight /upstairs and turn left／right．It' s next to…／behind... /between…and…
过程与方法
学生在前几个单元已经学会了询问和指点方向，能自然地与本课知识相连接。通过“Where’s the jazz music?”引入创设情景，引起学生的兴趣。并借助媒体来调动学生的积极性。
情感态度价值观
明确相关音乐分类的英文表达法，巩固方位感的表达方式。
教学重、难点及教学突破
重点
1、The vocabulary
2、language points:
Where’s the jazz music?
Go straight /upstairs and turn left /right. It’s next to … / behind …/between…and …
难点
1 Asking for and giving directions
2 Kind- of music
教学突破
1对于本课的单词短语通过卡片、实物来强化记忆。
2 Language points的学习，借助于Where is……？的练习和课件的图画来使其形象化。
教学准备
教师准备
录音机、磁带、课件、光碟
学生准备
1、预习生词和课文。
2、带自己最喜欢的光碟或歌曲带。
教学步骤
教学步骤、时间 教师时间 学生活动 媒体应用
Step 1
Organization (1’) Organize Ss by greeting each other. Greetings
Step 2
Free talk (2’) Ask the student
1. “who is on duty?”
If there’s a student who doesn’t come, then ask.
2. “Is everyone here?”
3. “Where is he/she?”
4. “Why he/she isn’t here today?” The student who is on duty answer.
Step
Presentation 20’ 1. Ask eight Ss to come to the front of the room and stand in two rows, leaving a few feet between Ss. Let the other Ss ask and answer questions about “Where is …? “He is between…and…”
“Where is…?” “She is behind…?/next to…”
2. Tell the Ss “Do as I told you”.(point to a student) “Wang Ming, go straight/go ahead, and then turn left, then turn right.” Let the Ss follow the directions. 学生模仿练习(impairs)
并表演
“Where is …” “He is between … and …”
“Where is …”
“She is behind …/ next to …
学生模仿表演(in pairs)
A student do as the other student told him/her.
go straight/go ahead, and then turn left, then turn right.”
3. Let the Ss practice in pairs using the CDs they have brought.
Such as one student ask “Which kind of music do you like best?”
Let the other Ss answer.
“Jazz or Country or Dance or pop or classical music.”
4. Let the Ss look at the Section A (la)
Ask the Ss to tell what they see.
Guide Ss to understand that the pictures shows different types of music. (Point: teach the new word “upstairs” with a picture.
At the same time, can teach “downstairs”)
5. Ask Ss to match each picture with one of the words on the left. Say “Write the letter of each picture. next to the words on the left”. Point out the sample answer.
Check the answer. (Answers: 1b, 2c, 3d, 4e, 5a)
6. (For 1b) Draw a set of stairs on the board. At the top of the stairs, write “jazz” in a box at the eight.
Write the three conversations on the Bb, then read it as you use your fingers to “walk” up the stairs and turn left to the “jazz” section. Then ask various Ss to come to the front of the Bb to read the other conversations, at the same time, use their fingers to walk to each section mentioned.
Play the recording the first time.
Play the recording the second time. This time, ask the Ss to listen to the recording and write the number of each conversation in the correct box. Point out the Sample answer.
Correct the answers.
(Answers: From left to right: 3, 2, 1)
7. (1c, Pair work)
Point to the conversations in 1b and ask Ss to read after you.
Use the stairs you drew on the board earlier. Erase the words you wrote before and write in the words “country” and “pop” to the left of the stairs, “dance” straight ahead of the stairs and “jazz” and “classical” to the right of the stairs.
8 (For 2a)
Ask four Ss to come to the front of the classroom. Arrange the Ss so that one is in the middle and the others are to the left of, to the right of, and behind the first student. Then describe the location of the Ss using the words “behind, next to and between”. For example, “Li Peng is behind Zhou Wen. Cao Ying is next Zhou Wen is between Cao Ying and Cong Zheng.”
Letn the Ss look at the pictures. Ask Ss to tell what they see in each picture.
Ask Ss to match each numbered sentence with one of the pictures. Say “Write the letter of each picture next to the correct sentence.
Check the answers. 小组表演
One student ask “Which kind of music do you like best?” Let the other Ss answer “Jazz or Country or Dance or pop or classical music”
到黑板前表演，并用手指按照所说的指引方向。
“Where’s the dance music?”
“Go straight and turn left.”
“Where’s the classical music?”
“Go upstairs and turn right.”
Ss listen to the tape carefully
Ask Ss to match each numbered sentence with one of the pictures 多媒体放映图一
录音机
(The answers are 1a, 2c, 3b)
9 (For 2b)
First, tell the Ss that suppose they are clerks of a music store, if someone asks them the directions, what they should do?
Notices
注意CDs和 videos 中的s 发的[z] 解说在以元音或浊辅音([z], [v], [dv]除外)结尾的名词后读[z]。
例如：play [pleiz], doogs [z].
10 Ask Ss to work in pairs. Suppose one student is a clerk of a music store, the other is asking him/her for different kinds of CDs, show her the Ss listen to the tape carefully and label the map of the CD store Ss write them down
分角色扮演
directions by looking.
At the map at Page 36, 2b.
Step 4
Practice (6’) Pairwork
Practice the conversations by looking at the screen and pictures on the Bb, ask and answer questions about other places in the pictures. Ss practice the dialogue in pairs “Where’s the pop music?” “It’s …” 多媒体放映 2a, 2b
Step 5
Just for fun (5’) 1. Ask all Ss to read the conversation. Have Ss identify the two characters in the cartoon.
2. Ask pairs of Ss to present the dialogue to the rest of the class.
3. Ask Ss to play both roles.
Work in pairs
Step6
Summary (2) 1. Summary the language points of this lesson.
2. Words and phrases of this class.
3. Language points.
Step 7
Test (4’) 同“练习设计 Do it by themselves.
Step 8
Consolidtion (4’) 1. Let’s Ss keep the Grammar Focus in their hearts.
2. Ss practice the Grammar Focus in pairs by looking at the pictures on the Bb.
Practice in pairs.
Homework (1’) Practice the dialogues according to the pictures on Page 35 and 36
本课小结
本节课学习了10个生词，和？句式的练习运用及学习了。通过本节课的学习，学生能熟练的用英语询问和指点方向，也能用英语说出不同类型的音乐。
问题探究与拓展活动
本节课主要学习问路、指路和各种类型的音乐。学生掌握后，可以问学生如果别人问路而他不知道时该如何办？本课的拓展活动为Shelf - Check中的Just for fun,同时增进本课所学。如：
When’s the pop music／dance music?
Where are the country CDs／jazz CDs?
I don’t know! You don't? No, I don’t. I don't work here.
练习设计
随堂练习设计
按要求做题
downstairs（反义词） videos,
将下列词组翻译成英语。
在…的旁边 在…和…之间 上楼 下楼
一直往前走 向右转 爵士音乐 古典音乐
个性练习设计
翻译下列句子：
1、流行乐在哪里？上楼后向右转。在舞曲的旁边
2、舞曲在哪里？上楼后一直往前走。它在流行乐和乡村乐的旁边。
3. 乡村乐碟在哪里？他们在舞曲碟的旁边
4. 爵士乐碟在哪里？它们在乡村乐的旁边。
板书设计
Unit 6 Where um the jam CDs？
1, Where’s the pop music? go straight
Go upstairs and turn right. go upstairs-go downstairs
It’s next to the dance music. pop music
2,Where are the country CDs? Between …and …
They are behind the jazz CDs．turn right／left
Section A（二）
教学内容
Section A中3,4以及Self check中1,2两部分
教学目标
知识与能力
1. Match the vocabulary : group, singer
2. Master and use：What’s yaw favorite kind of music？
My favorite kind of music is country．
过程与方法
通过“What’s Bob’s favorite kind of music?”引入创设情景，引起学生的兴趣。并借助多媒体来提高学生的主动性，让其大量练习。
情感态度价值观
在上节课的基础上，对于音乐分类的表达和指点位置更加熟练，运用自如。
教学重、难点及教学突破
重点
1. The vocabulary．
2. language points: What's your favorite kind of music？
My favorite kind of music is country．
Who's your favorite group?
My favorite group is The Smith Family．
难点
The language points
教学突破
在摹仿的基础上逐渐能用单词替换的方式熟记表达法。
教学准备
教师准备
录音机、磁带、课件、光碟
学生准备
预习生词和课文。
将自己最喜欢的歌手或乐队列出，并将其歌曲分类。
教学步骤
教学步骤、时间 教师活动 学生活动 媒体应用
Step 1
Organization(1’) Organize Ss by greeting each other.
Step 2
Free talk (2’) Ask the students
1. “Who is on duty?”
If there’s a student who doesn’t come, then ask
2. “Is everyone here?”
3. “Where is he /she?”
4. “Why he/she isn’t here today?” Answer.
Step 3
Revision (5’) 1. Draw a set of stairs on the Bb, at the top of the stairs, write “dance” in a box, and “pop” in a box in its right, and “country” on its left, behind the pop box write “jazz”, and behind the country box write “classical”
2. 2. Let the Ss works in pairs, practice the dialogues by looking at the picture. Ss work in pairs
1. “Where’s the pop music?” “Go upstairs and turn right. It’s next to the dance music.”
2. “Where’s the jazz music?” “Go straight and turn left. It’s …
3. …4. …
Step 4
Presentation (15’) 1.处是些听风的一张图片，问学生 “Who is he?”
Let the Ss answer. Then say: “Yes, you’re right, he is xie tingfeng.”
Ask a student “What is he? /What does he do?” (student can answer in Chinese.)
“Yes, he is a singer.” Teach the word ‘singer’.(sing-singer)
2. 让学生无人一组谈论
“Who is your favorite singer?”
“Who is your favorite group?”
“What’s your favorite kind of music?”
Let the Ss write their answers in the chart on the book (SectionA, 4)
3. Ask a student the other four’s favorite singer/goup/kind of music. eg, ask Wang Ping:
“Who is Li Ming’s favorite singer/group?”
“What’s Li Ming’s favorite kind of music?”
4. Let the Ss work in pairs. Ask the other three Ss in their group their favorite singer/group/kind of music.
5. Let a student describe the musical tasts of the other Ss in thir groups. Such as: Liu Fang’s favorite kind of music is dance, and his favorite singer is Sun Yue.
6. Tell the Ss “If I’m student A, if I want to know what Bob’s favorite kind of music is, what should I ask?” “Yes, I should ask ‘What’s favorite kind of music?’”
7. Ask the pairs to continue on their own.
Move around the room monitoring the progress of the pairs.
8. Go over the answers.
The answer are:
Bob: classical The Boston Orchestra
Carla: jazz Boys from Brzil
Mary: dance Patsy Street
Joe: country The Smith Family
Ss answer: ‘He is Xie Tingfeng.”
Answer my question in Chinese or English
Ss work in group of
five.
“Who is your favorite singer?”
“Who is your favorite group?”
“What’s your favorite kind of music?”
Ask the other’s favorite singer/group/kind of music Work in groups.
Ss describe the musical tastes of the other Ss in their group.
Ss listen carefully
Work in pairs
Student A in each pair look at the chart on Page 37. Student B look at e the chart on Page92
Ask and answer
“What’s Bob’s/Carla’s/Mary’s/Joe’s favorite kind of music?” and so on. 多媒体放映
Step5
Consolidation（6’） Give Ss five minutes to consolidate the language points by practicing the dialogues which this class have learned in pairs. Work in pairs.
Step 6
Summary
(2’) Summa the language points of this lesson.
Show the teaching aims. Ss read after the teacher. 多媒体放映
Step 7
Test(8’) Self Check1, 2.
Ask Ss to check all the words they know.
Ask Ss to find out the meaning of any words they don’t know. They can do this by reviewing to unit, asking the teacher, asking their classmates, or using dictionaries.
Ask Ss to write five new words in their Vocabulary on Page 106.
After Ss to have recorded their new words, ask to have recorded their new words, ask them to share their lists with other Ss.
2. 同练习设计 Check all the words they know.
Find out the meaning of any words they don’t know.
Work in groups.
Homework
(1’) 1 Practice the dialogue in pairs after class.
“What ‘s your favorite kind of music?”
“Who’s your favorite singer/group?”
2 预习Section B 中的1a, 1b, 2a, 2b, 2c.
本课小结
本节学习了2个生词和What's your favorite kind of music？及Who's Bob's favorit group/singer句式的练习和运用。通过本节课的学习，学生能熟练地用英语谈论自〔喜欢的歌词和乐队。
教学探讨与反思
教师通过展示明星卡片，来引起学生的兴趣，通过对自己喜欢的歌手和乐队的谈论，（例如小组谈论”Who is your favorite singer？’’“Who is your favorite group？’
“What's your favorite kind of music？’），引导学生联系实际，谈论一下当前国内－些较为流行的音乐，歌手及乐队等．
练习设计
(A类学生全做，B类学生只做1)
1按要求变换下列句子。
(1) My favorite kind of music is country.（划线提问）
(2) Bob’s favorite group is the Smith Family．（划线提问）
(3 ) My mother's favorite singer is Cheng Long.（划线提问）
2在横线上填上适当的介词
(1) Please look ______this page．
(2) Work ______small groups. Ask your classmates ______ their favorite groups or singers.
(3) Where's the pop music？It's next ________ the dance music．
(4) What's your favorite kind ______ music?
板书设计
Unit 6 Where are the jazz CDs
1 What’s Bob’s favorite kind of music? sing-singer
His favorite kind of music is … in small groups
2. Who’s Carla’s favorite group? Look at
Her favorite group is …
教学内容
Section B中1a, 1b, 2a, 2b, 2c
教学目标
知识能力
1. Master the vocabulary: amazing awful bad Latin sound
2. Can talk about singers or musical groups
过程与方法
学生在本单元Section A中已学过不同风格的音乐如;jazz music, dance music, classical music等，已具备了学习本课的初步知识，课前通过放不同风格的乐曲录音来导人新课，让学生通过听录音后的感受，来谈论他们喜欢的歌手或乐队。
情感态度价值观
教育学生学会欣赏不同风格的音乐，陶冶他们的情操。
教学重、难点及教学突破
重点
1 The vocabulary
2 Language：Talk about singer or musical groups
难点
Talk about singers or musical groups
教学突破
1. 本课学习的单词主要是一些表示感情色彩的形容词，可通过丰富的表情演示来学习
2. Language放音乐录音，让学生边听边谈
教学准备
教师准备
录音机、磁带(不同风格的音乐磁带)课件
学生准备
预习生词，收集自己喜欢的歌手或乐队的资料
教学步骤
教学步骤、时间 教师活动 学生活动 媒体应用
Step l
Organization
（1’） Organize Ss by greeting each other
Step 2
Free talk(2}） Ask the student:
1 “Who is on duty?”
2 “What’s your favorite kind of music?”
3“Who’s your favorite singer/ group?” The student talk about something
Step3
Presentation
（15'） la:
1．Focus attention on the three faces：
Guide students to understand the meanings of the three faces: the snide face means“I like it”．The middle face with no smile means “I don’t like it or dislike it“. The frown face means ”I don’t like it“ 读单词并根据单词意思做出不同的表情
2．Then call attention to the list of words. Say each one and ask student's to repeat then talk about what it means．
（借助面部表情及声音来解释单词并让学生根据不同的单词做出不同的表情）
3．Ask students to draw the correct face on the line to each word． Draw the correct face
on the line．
1b：
1．Play a piece of dance music let students listen then ask them：Do you like the dance music?
Guide the students to answer:
”Yes，I do. It’s awful．” Then play another type of music, such as classical, jazz, country and so on
2．Ask each student to make a list of three singers or musical groups then ask them to work on pairs：
A: Do you like the Latin Sound?
B：No，I don’t．They’re awful．
C：Do you like?
D: Yes，I do．No, I don’t.
2a:
1．Let the Ss look at the chart and the pictures of the four students，tell them they will listen to recording of these four persons．Write the name
of each person’s favorite kind of music/favorite groups/singer and Description word in the blank under their photo，Then play the recording the first time, Ss only listen
2. Play the recording again．This time students listen and write their answers in the chart． Listen the music and
answer the question．
Make a list
Work in pairs
Do you like?
Yes …
No, ….
Listen to the cording
Listen and write.
Look at the chart．
Listen and complete
the chart．
2b Play the
tape
录音机
录音机
1. let Ss look at the chart on the right, tell them that we will listen the recording again. listen and complete the chart.
2. Play the tape，students write the favorite group or singer and the description words in the chart．
Step 4
Practice
(5’） 2c:
Tell the students: This activity we will work in pain，you are Mike and your deskmate is Judy. Have a conversation about music like 2b. Talk about the music in pairs
Step 5
Summary
(2'） 1．Words and phrases of this class
2. Language points talk about singers and musical groups. Talk about the music in pairs
Step 6
Consolidation
(8'） Show the pictures of Tian Zhen, Na Ying.，Sun Nan，Beyound group，Yuquan and play their music,
let the students talk about them. Look, listen and talk 课件
（二）
Step 7
Homework(1’） 1．预习Section B中句3a,3b,3c
2画张学校的平面图
本课小结
本节课学习了5个生词和Do you like? What's your favorite句式的练习和运用。通过本节课的学习，学生能更加熟练地用英语谈论自己喜欢的歌词和乐队。
教学探讨与反思
通过对国外某些歌手和乐队（Who’s your favorite singer/group？What’s your favorite kind of music?）的谈论，引导学生联系实际，谈论一下当前国内一些较为流行的音乐，歌手及乐队等．
练习设计
（见课件Test）
板书设计
Unit 6. Where are the jazz CDs?
1 amazing, awful，bad， 3 Do you like The Latin
great sound，terrible， No，I don’t．They’re awful /fantastic
2 What' your favorite... 4 Do you like Livinia Casey？
My favorite…is… Yes，I do．She's cool．
Section B（二）
教学内容
Section B中3a，3b，3c，4和Self Check中3．
教学目标
知识与能力
1. The words（three skills）: direction，culture, palace, area，western，eastern，hall，traditional，and，painting, by, and so on，gate
2. Master: How to give directions to the places that people ask you.
过程与方法
学生在第一课时就已经学会指引方向，已具备了学习本课的知识，这是第一课时的进一步学习。通过询问学生其学校所在地来引人创设情景，让学生有身临其境之感。需大量练习口头表达，同时提高学生的英语阅读能力。
情感态度价值观
正确表达各种情绪：
喜欢，不喜欢等等。
教学重、难点及教学突破
重点
1 The vocabulary
2 How to give directions
难点
How to give directions．
教学突破
1、对于生词学生只要会读、说、听就可以了，学生通过查阅字典或问老师或问同伴来自己解决，提高学生的自学能力。
2、对于方向的指引，通过大量的练习和课件的图画来突破解决。
教学准备
教师准备
课件
学生准备
预习生词和课文。
教学步骤
教学步骤、时间 教师活动 学生活动 媒体应用
Step 1
Organization
（1’） Organize Ss by greeting each other.
Step 2
Free talk
(2'） Ask the students：
1．“Who is on duty?”
2．“What's your favorite kind of music?”
3． “Who’s your favorite singer / group？” Students answer my questions
Step3
Presentation
（15’） 1．“Now，pop music fans，listen carefully，if you，here”．（Start with a circle and label it．“You are here“）
Read the first set of instructions，draw a map of the pop store．
For example，when you read the words “Go straight’，draw an arrow straight up.
When you read the words “Turn left at the classical music’，
draw a box and label it‘classical music’，Then continue your first arrow around this box to the left．
Let Ss draw a map on the exercises books．
At the same time，let the other Ss look at the country music section, draw a map．in groups of four.
Let Ss work in groups of four，check the accuracy of the map by reading the instructions as their fingers through the map．
2．（3b），First，let the Ss look at the Big Sound music store map Point to each section of the store and ask Ss to read all the labels on the drawing.
Then ask Ss to fill in the missing words by themselves．
（As Ss work，the teacher can move around the room monitoring progress and answering any questions they may have．）The third，ask the Ss to check each other' s
won，and the teacher check the answers Pop music fans draw a map on their Exs books．
Draw maps
Ss work in groups of four．
Ss use their fingers to trace the path．
to the classical music section． 多媒体
投影地
图
3，Let the Ss write directions to the jazz/dance/country/pop sections. They can use the same kind of sentences.（As Ss work，the teacher can move around the mom monitoring progress and answering any questions they may have．）Ask Ss to check each other's work．Then
check the answers． Write directions 多媒体
投影地
图多媒
体投影
Step 4
Practice
(7’） From each group to be the first to give directions to be a location somewhere in the school．Tell the students that the first student to correctly guess the answer takes the next turn．
Self check(3a)
1．Let the students read the article by themselves．Find out the words that don't know list it. They can learn them by looking them up the directions or asking the teacher or the classmates or looking at the books．
2．Let the students read the words they don’t know after the teacher. Summa, the language points of this unit．
（见小结）
见练习设计。 Work in groups
Ss do the activity 多媒体
投影学
校平面
图
本课小结
本节课还是主要练习了问路与指路，同时在selfcheck中接触到了一些生词，学生只要做到会听、说就可以了。
问题探究与拓展活动
本节课中，可以让学生在知道west一western，east ---eastern的同时，自己找出表示方向的名词转换为形容词时在其后面直接加ern就可以了。（例如south一southern, north一northern, southeast一southeastern northeast一northeastern，…等等。）并出训练题，如个性练习。
练习设计
随堂练习设计
用适当的介词填空：
1．Direction _____ the Country Music section.
2．Turn left _____ the classical music
3．Pop music is _____ jazz and dance.
4．Look _____ the Big Sound music store map．Then fill ______ the blanks．
5．The classical music is next ______ the country music．
6. Welcome ________ the Culture Palace．
7．You can listen _______ classical music ______ Area E．
8．There you can see the traditional paintings ______ Qi Baishi．
个性练习设计
用所给词的适当形式填空。
1．We have a _______ (west) section，the left，and on ______ （east)section on the right．
2．a _______ （northeast）wind（东北风）
A _________（southeast）wind（东南风）
3．the _______ States of the U.S.A.（south)（美国南部各州）
4．The _______ （north)States of the U.S.A
注：解说表示方向的n.＋ern就成了形容词
板书设计
Unit 6．Where are the jazz CDs?
Go straight west一western
Turn left at the east一eastern
pop section. south一southern
The classical music is north一northern
next to the country southeast一southeastern
music northwest一northwestern
教学探讨与反思
在本单元的教学中，多数学生能按照老师的要求掌握好大纲的内容，而且本单元的内容与学生的生活息息相关，在现实生活中经常遇到，也经常谈论。通过小组练习、讨论，练习“Where’s the jazz music？” “It's …”. ”What’s your favorite kind of music？”“It’s …” “Who's your favorite singer？……多数学生掌握得相当好。但是学生的自主学习能力尚待提高。
七年级英语教案【篇3】
【学习目标】：
1、熟练掌握本课13个单词.
2、谈论对方喜欢或不喜欢的食物。
【学习重点】：
名词的复数形式。
【学习过程】：
一、自主学习(教师寄语：knowledge is power.)
学习任务一: 会读写本课13个单词.
1.个人自读，记忆本课单词.
2.小组互相检查单词读写情况.
3.根据汉语写出下列英语单词并展示
喜欢___________香蕉_____________汉堡包___________西红柿_________
花椰菜_________薯条_____________橙子_____________冰____________
奶油__________ 冰淇淋_________ 沙拉___________ 草莓_________梨__________
学习任务二: 谈论对方喜欢或不喜欢的食物。
1. 录音完成1b ( 面的对话编号)
2. 两人一组练习1b 对话.
3. pair work 和你同伴模仿1b对话.编新对话.
二、合作共建(教师寄语：many hands make light work. )
小组讨论你所学的不可数名词.
_______________________________________________________
三、系统总结(教师寄语：no man can do two things at once.)
i. 一般情况下加 -s . 如： book books
hamburger _____________pear__________ banana_______________ orange_________ ii. 以 o 结尾的加 -s 或-es 如： photo photos
tomato _______________
iii. 以 s . sh ch . x 结尾的`加-es 如： watch watches
bus _________
iv . 以辅音字母加 y 结尾的变 y 为 i 加 es . 如： dictionary dictionaries
strawberry __________ family _______________
四、 诊断评价：
(一) 翻译下列句子.
1.我喜欢花椰菜。
____________________________________________________________
2.我不喜欢橘子。
__________________________________________________________
3.他喜欢西红柿.
__________________________________________________________
4.她不喜欢梨.
____________________________________________________________
5.你喜欢冰淇淋吗?不，我不喜欢
__________________________________________________________
6.你喜欢草莓吗?是的，我喜欢。
________________________________________________________
(二) 根据句意及汉意写出下列单词
(1) do you l ________ salad ?
(2) i want to eat some b _________.
七年级英语教案【篇4】
七年级上册语文知识点教案第一课
开学第一课
欢迎大家来到崭新的语文课堂，上次我们已经接受了小初中衔接的辅导，同学们拿到这本七年级上的语文课本也有很长时间了，已经翻阅过的请举手?你们感觉初中语文和小学语文有什么不同的地方?
今天这节课，我们先不进入我们的课文学习，我们不妨先进行一场进入初中语文课堂的的欢迎仪式，或者说是语文学习的启动仪式。这场欢迎仪式将分为三个主题：一、欢迎大家来到语文大课堂;二、欢迎大家来到语文大乐园;三、确定语文学习的目标。
切入主题之前，我首先要讲一下学习上的要求：
⒈准备四本本子：
①笔记本(学习日志)：每一天都记号日期，记下错题、基础字词知识、上课要求、作业要求、课堂重点内容，来不及先记书上，课后整理，课下反反复复多回顾。
②作业本③听写默写本④作文本⑤课余读书摘抄本 读书札记
⒉准备好语文学习工具书：《现代汉语词典》 《古汉语常用字字典》 商务印书馆
⒊上课要求：
①双手放桌上
②除规定的讨论朗读时间外，保持教室安静，不讲和上课内容无关的话，树立公共课堂的公共意识，上课不认真不守纪律由课代表扣分记入期末总评成绩
③主动答疑：课上完之后，都可以到办公室提出疑问。
⒋作业要求：
按时完成作业，字写端正，第二天到校立即上交小组长，没有做完的(包括听默写没有通过)中午到办公室检查，完成后回家
预习：字词摘录、课文熟读、思考课后问题
一、欢迎大家来到语文大课堂
我们看到幻灯片上特别凸显了这个“大”字，所谓海纳百川，有容乃大，语文两个字的解释是：语言和文字以及语言和文学。它有一个很大的彰显其特色的学习范围，你的视野会变得非常开阔。
初中语文的学习内容：
⒈课文：
现代诗歌、现代散文、民间传说、说明文(科学技术、经济社会)、新闻通讯、人物传记、小说节选、微型小说、文言文、古典诗词。
人物分析、语言分析、情感分析、段落分析、语义分析、自我启发和感悟
⒉语言文字基础：
现代文：注音、字形、多音字、成语、熟语、造句、词义、句型、修辞、语法、标点符号。
文言文、古诗词：文言实词、文言虚词、文言句式、通假字、古今异义
⒊写作：以记叙、抒情、议论文章为主
以上这些是我们三年系统性的学习要接触的内容，由此可见第一即是内容范围上的大，跨越古今、国别，现代性、古典性、启蒙性、社会性相杂糅。第二则是学习效用之大，小学时你们的老师肯定说过，学好语文就意味着为其他学科的审题解答奠定基础，语言文字是人类沟通交流最基本的条件，在一些思想家比如卢梭看来，语言文字认识和接受的不平等是人类不平等的起源之一，语言被划为了贵族语言和平民语言，文字只有少数人才能掌握，导致了人类的贵贱有别，而我们现代教育的语文学习即是要打破这种不平等，要每个人都掌握相同的语言文字运用才能，获得人类文明中平等的认知权、沟通权和思考权。
二、欢迎大家来到语文大乐园
下面我们来继续探讨语文学习的第二个主题，我们学习语文的概念，不仅仅局限在简单地阅读分析课文，写命题考场作文，以及反复的做题上，这是理科的学习方法。语文学习在课堂外有很大的延伸空间，这就是所谓的大乐园主题。学习应该是充满乐趣的，我们应该提倡一种快乐语文的学习方式，这些乐趣总的体现在：
⒈阅读的乐趣
上课，完成作业，只是我们看到的学习的表面，学好语文，离不开阅读大量的文字，阅读应该与我们的生活密切联系，一本课外的好书可以提前几年提升你的知识境界，可以更新你的知识含量，21世纪一份报纸一周的信息量比18世纪人类一生掌握的信息量还多。你们不用抱着学会什么的任务心态去阅读，要利用课余非学习的时间，仅仅是捧起一本书，随意的翻开，不用怕读不懂，第一遍不懂，多读几遍肯定就会有自己的理解。抄下你感到有意义的句子，当你确实有了很深的感悟想要抒发的话，写一篇读后感是水到渠成的事。
有这么一个一个故事，俄国作家契诃夫写过一篇短篇小说叫做《打赌》，讲的是一次晚会上，银行家和一个年轻的律师打赌，律师将在一间小屋里囚禁，“规定在十五年间他无权跨出门槛，看见活人，听见人声，收到信件和报纸。允许他有一样乐器，可以读书、写信、喝酒和抽烟。跟外界的联系，根据契约，他只能通过一个为此特设的小窗口进行，而且不许说话。他需要的东西，如书，乐谱，酒等等，他可以写在纸条上，要多少给多少，但只能通过窗口。”按照约定，15年后，他将得到银行家的大半财产。15年过去了，年轻人除了每天要求外界给他送书，始终没有走出过屋子一步，到达规定日期的前一天，银行家反悔了，他决定在深夜潜入屋子，杀死那个年轻律师，守住自己的财富。一根将要燃尽的蜡烛旁边，他看到已经骨瘦如柴的年轻人正熟睡着，旁边放着一封刚刚写好的信：信中说，他感谢企业家，十五年来他读了许多书，这些知识将是他终身用不尽的财富，他还明白了许多道理。他决定不再要企业家的财产，他将于明天拂晓前破窗而出，自动毁约。一起来听一下信中的一段话：
十五年来，我潜心研究人间的生活。的确，我看不见天地和人们，但在你们的书里我喝着香醇的美酒，我唱歌，在树林里追逐鹿群和野猪，和女人谈情说爱……由你们天才的诗人凭借神来之笔创造出的无数美女，轻盈得犹如臼云，夜里常常来探访我，对我小声讲述着神奇的故事，听得我神迷心醉。在你们的书里，我攀登上艾尔布鲁士和勃朗峰的顶巅，从那里观看早晨的日出，观看如血的晚霞如何染红了天空、海洋和林立的山峰。我站在那里，看到在我的上空雷电如何劈开乌云，像人蛇般游弋;我看到绿色的森林、原野、河流、湖泊、城市，听到塞王的歌唱和牧笛的吹奏;我甚至触摸过美丽的魔鬼的翅膀，它们飞来居然跟我谈论上帝……在你们的书里我也坠入过无底的深渊，我创造奇迹，行凶杀人，烧毁城市，宣扬新的宗教，征服了无数王国……
你们的书给了我智慧。不倦的人类思想千百年来所创造的一切，如今浓缩成一团，藏在我的头颅里。我知道我比你们所有的人都聪明。
我也蔑视你们的书，蔑视人间的各种幸福和智慧。一切都微不足道，转瞬即逝，虚幻莫测，不足为信，有如海市蜃楼。虽然你们骄傲、聪明而美丽，然而死亡会把你们彻底消灭，就降消灭地窖里的耗子一样，而你们的子孙后代，你们的历史，你们的不朽天才，将随着地球一起或者冻结成冰，或者烧毁。为了用行动向你们表明我蔑视你们赖以生活的一切，我放弃那两百万，虽说我曾经对它像对天堂一样梦寐以求，可是现在我蔑视它。为了放弃这一权利，我决定在规定期限之前五个小时离开这里，从而违反契约……
银行家最后放弃了杀他的打算，律师则在第二天早晨偷偷地离开了屋子。他的感悟虽然有些极端，但我们可以看到，真正的阅读是充满无限吸引力的。
你们处在中考的学习压力下，课堂语文学习会以考试做题为中心，这很容易让你们沦为考试工具，失去思想和智慧的发展潜能，为了开阔视野，我们更需要培养阅读兴趣，把读书当做信仰一般，这样，不久的将来，你们既能升入好的高中，同时也会装满丰富的思想，让自己的人生充满更多乐趣。
⒉电影、音乐的乐趣
一本好电影比我们的课文有更深的心灵震荡，一首好的歌词会有诗一样的语言，让我们获得更美的文字体验。
三、确定语文学习的目标
阅读、欣赏电影和音乐，提升的是我们的文艺素养和气质，我希望这是你们一辈子都离不开的事。但是三年，我们有一个短期的目标，每一学期的期末考，三年后的中考，要检查你掌握的知识能力，决定你能不能升入杭二、学军、杭高这样的全国名校。所以我们的学习目标是这样的：掌握良好的阅读文章能力、文字运用及写作能力;会背诵一定篇目的古诗词、文章;掌握现代文、文言文的基础字词知识。我的要求是：把我当做你们的向导，跟着我，多思考，把每一次课当做一步楼梯，一步一步的走，认认真真地上好课，做好作业，背诵好文字，持之以恒，千万不要落下。
确定课代表、组长
作业：预习第一篇课文
我的语文学习目标
我最喜欢的一本书
我期待一个什么样的语文老师
学习语文的方法
1、注重日常积累：语文考验的是自己肚中的墨水，若是自己没有一定知识累积的话，语文成绩自然不高。所以想要提升语文成绩，平时更应该注重诗词好句的积累。
2、学会理解文章：通过理清文章的结构层次，明确课文的内在逻辑，把结构层级作为记忆线索，形成知识网络，更能方便记忆。
3、学会观察周围：写作是源于生活的，最打动人的往往是细节之处。所以平时要多观察生活，写作时多做细节描写，才能真正为作文进行润色，让老师能眼前一亮。
学习语文的技巧
1、学习未动，兴趣先行
2、务学与求道
3、自信是成功的第一秘诀
4、态度决定一切
5、不强调进步
6、练就过硬的本领是学习的根本目的
7、会玩、会偷懒、然后会学
8、考试、分析考试结果、做出下一步计划、调整自己
9、学习别人
七年级英语教案【篇5】
1．词汇(略)。
2．句型：
1) What would you/he/she like?
2)Would you like…?
3)I/He/Shed like…
4)What about…?
1．复习。重复上一课步骤4。
2．教师手持食物和饮料的图片，问某个同学：Would you like some bread? 让学生猜这句话意思。如猜不出，教师可加以解释，并板书这个句子。如果这个同学答：Yes，则请他(或她)站在前面，手持画有几个面包的图片，面向大家。
问答继续进行。先后请4位同学，手里各持一张表示自己想要的食物(或饮料)的图片。这时教师手指这4位同学，向全班提问：
让学生猜这句话含义，并板书这句话。启发大家按前面4位同学手中图画的内容，分别答出：
…would like some bread… would like some apples, etc.
教师可以再问这4位同学一次，启发他们分别用以下句型回答问题：
T：…, what would you like?
3．打开课本，按课文第一部分所列的问题，两人一组先找出答案，然后进行问答练习。请几组同学读出自己的小对话。
4．指导学生看课文第二部分插图，教师解释当时的情景，并教本课生词。
5．放课文录音。教师先板书一个问题：
What would they like?
学生听两遍录音，回答教师的问题。再放录音，学生跟读两至三遍。
6．教师重点讲解本课表示征求意见、表达愿望的几个主要句型。
7．两人一组，用课文第三部分所提供的替换词，编新的小对话。请两组同学表演。
8．指导学生做练习册习题，教师重点讲解习题2的内容。
1)抄写生词、练习朗读本课对话，牢记本课主要句型；
1．Can I help you? 您要点什么？
这是一句服务用语，类似的句子还有：What can I do for you? 例如：
A：What can I do for you? 您要点什么？
B：Id like some cakes, please. 我要些蛋糕。
2．What would you like? 你喜欢要点什么？
这是很客气的用语，来征求对方意见。服务人员，如：售货员、饭店服务员等在工作中经常使用这种语言。
如果家里来了客人，你请别人吃东西时，也可以使用这句话，让客人根据个人爱好去选择食品。询问对方是否喜欢吃某种食品，使用这个句型的一般疑问形式。
如：Would you like some bananas? 你吃点香蕉吗？
当表示自己想要什么东西时，可以用 I would like…这个句子来表达。
例如：
I would like a cup of tea, and four cakes, please. 我想要一杯茶，四块蛋糕。
在口语中，I would like通常缩略为：Id like…
3．What about something to eat? 来点吃的东西怎么样？
在这个短语中，动词不定式to eat放在something之后，起定语作用。可以理解为吃的东西。而something to drink就是喝的饮料了。
something是不定代词，不定代词被定语修饰时，一般定语要后置。
例如：Thats something very old. 这东西太旧了。
1. — What would you like?
— Id like some bread.
2. What would they like?
3. Can I help you?
4. What about something to eat?
七年级英语教案【篇6】
七年级英语上册复习教案
以下是为您推荐的七年级英语上册Unit3复习学案，希望本篇文章对您学习有所帮助。
一、重点句型。
1.I’mdressingupasaghost.我在装扮成一个魔鬼。
(1)dressup通常指小孩穿别人的衣服闹着玩，装扮;还只“穿上盛装，打扮”
MrSmithdressesupasFatherChristmasonChristmasEve.
史密斯先生在平安夜装扮成圣诞老人。
(2)as在句中用作介词，意为“好像”。(注意与dressupin的区别)
Asastudent,youshouldworkhard.作为学生，你应该努力学习。
2.GettingreadyforHalloween.为万圣节做准备。
getreadyfor意为“为……做准备”，后接名词或代词。
Wearegetreadyfortheparty.我们正在为聚会做准备。
3.Weplayagamecalled“trickortreat”.我们玩一个叫“不招待就是坏”的游戏。
agamecalled……:一个叫……的游戏;
called“trickortreat”是后置定语，用来修饰前面的游戏
a.Themancalled(named)Jamesismycousin.那个叫詹姆斯的'人是我的表哥。
b.TheycallhimJames.他们叫他詹姆斯。
4.Weknockonpeople’sdoorsandshout“trickortreat”.
(1)knockonpeople’sdoors意为“敲人家的门”，此处on可以用at代替。
Theteacherknockson(at)hisdesk.
(2)shout可以和at或者to连用，意为“朝着……喊叫”
Don’tshoutatothers.It’snotpolite.不要朝别人喊叫，这是不礼貌的
5.Usually,theygiveussomecandyasatreat.通常他们都用糖果招待我们。
givesbsthasatreat=givesbatreatofsth=givesthtosb.asatreat用某物招待某人
Theygiveusdumplingsasatreat.他们给我们饺子作为招待。
.=______________________________________=___________________________________
6.Iftheydon’tgiveusatreat,wecanplayatrickonthem.(if表示如果，假如)
(1)giveusatreat意为“招待我们”，这是givesb.sth.的结构，可用givesth.tosb.代替
(2)playatrick(tricks)onsb.属于固定结构，意为“作弄某人”。
Don’tplaytricksontheoldman.
7.Sometimeswepaintourfacesandpeopledonotknowwhoweare.
paint意为“给…..涂色”通常用于“paint+sth.+颜色”的结构。
Pleasepaintthewallgreen.请把墙涂绿。
8.Wecutouttheeyes,thenoseandthesharpteeth.
cutout在句子中意为“剪出，切出”
Ioftencutoutarticlesfromnewspapers.我经常从报纸上剪文章。
9.wearspecialcostumeswithmaskswith表示有或伴随的状态，是介词
Isawagirlwithredhair.我看见一个红头发的女孩。
10.make......outof……用…制成…
Wemakemodelplanesoutofpaper.我们用纸做成了模型飞机。
11.Wehavehotdrinksandeatlotsofnice,hotfood.
(1)drink饮料，food食物。一般是不可数，表示各种饮料和食物时，可当可数名词。
Let’shavesomedrink./manydifferentknidsofdrinks
(2)hotdrinks,热饮;colddrinks,冷饮。
(3)drimk也有动词是意思。如：Iwanttodrinksomewater.
二、词组归纳。
1.Let’scelebrate!
2.Whatareyoudoing?
3.dressupas
4.peopleintheUSA
5.getcardsandpresents
6.paintourfaces
7.ChineseNewYear
8.DragonBoatFestival
9.Mid-Autumnfestival
10.atHalloween
11.liketodosth.
12.atigercostume
13.getreadyfor
14.makelanternsoutoforanges
15.thanksb.fordoingsth.
16.tellsb.aboutsth.
17.celebrateChristmas
18.haveaspecialparty
19.ontheeveningofOctober31st
20.dosth.for
21.agamecalled“trickortreat”
22.knockon/at
23.givesb.sth.asatreat
24.playatrickonsb.
25.specialcostumeswithmasks
26.makepumpkinlanterns
27.cutoutthesharpteeth
28.eatturkey
29.eatricedumplings
让我们来庆祝!
你在干什么?
装扮成……样子
美国人
收到卡片和礼物
涂脸
中国的新年(春节)
端午节
中秋节
在万圣节
喜欢做某事
一件老虎戏服
为……做准备
用橘子做灯笼
感谢某人做某事
告诉某人有关某事
庆祝圣诞节
举行特殊的晚会
在十月三十一日的晚上
为……做某事
一个叫“不招待就使坏”的游戏
敲(门或窗)
以……招待某人
对某人使恶作剧
带面具的特别服装
制作南瓜灯
切、割出锋利的牙齿
吃火鸡
吃粽子
七年级英语教案【篇7】
一、作者简介
巴金，现代著名作家。原名李尧棠，字芾甘，19生于四川成都。建国后曾任中国文联副主席，中国作家协会副主席、主席，作协上海分会主席，上海文联主席，《收获》主编。主要作品有：长篇小说《爱情三部曲》(《雾》《雨》《电》)，《激流三部曲》(《家》《春》《秋》);中篇小说《憩园》，《寒夜》;散文集《保卫和平的人们》，《友谊集》，《随想录》;散文、小说、特写集《新声集》，《赞歌集》，还有不少短篇小说、童话、杂文等。
二、《繁星》的写作背景
这篇文章选自巴金的《海上杂记》。1923年，19岁的巴金和三哥毅然冲破封建家庭的樊笼到了上海，南京，考入东南大学附中补习班。在学习期间，参加了一些社会活动，著名的五卅运动对他的影响较大，他的民主思想得到进一步发展。1927年1月15日，他乘法国轮船昂热号离沪赴法，卫惠林同行，先后同船的中国学生计9人。他去法国是为了学习经济学，向西方找真理，进一步研究无政府主义理论，考察欧洲的社会活动。法国既是无政府主义的发源地，也是当时欧洲的政治流放者的庇护所。2月18日，昂热号邮轮抵达马赛。19日巴金抵达巴黎。在邮船航行期间，巴金撰写了《海上杂记》38则。《繁星》是其中的一篇游记，写于1927年1月。
七年级英语教案【篇8】
一、教学目标：
1. 语言知识目标：
1) 能掌握以下单词： rain, windy, cloudy, sunny, snow, weather, cook, bad, park,
message, take a message, could, back, problem
能掌握以下句型：
① —How's the weather in Beijing?
—It's sunny.
② —Can I take a message for him?
—Yes. Could you just tell him to call me back?
—Sure, no problem.
2) 能用所学的知识描述天气情况。
3)描述正在发生的动作。
2. 情感态度价值观目标：
教育学生善于观察天气，善于调整自己的情绪;了解世界各地的天气情况，增加世界观念。知道大自然的力量是神奇而伟大的，我们应当好好学习，立志学好科学知识，为长大后探索神奇的大自然，打好基础。
二、教学重难点
1. 教学重点：
1) The vocabulary and useful expressions.
2) —How’s the weather?
—It's raining/ windy.
3) —What are you doing?
—I'm playing basketball.
2. 教学难点：
运用目标语言来对天气进行问答，并且会问答其他人正在进行的活动。
三、教学过程
Ⅰ. Warming-up and Lead in
1. Greet the Ss and check the homework.
2. Watch a video program about the weather.
Ⅱ. Presentation
1. (Show some pictures of the weather)
Let Ss look at the pictures and ask them how the weather is.
Ss learn the new words and expressions with the help of the pictures.
2. Look at the pictures in 1a. Then read the new words on the right. Ask the Ss to match the words with pictures.
3. Check the answers.
Ⅲ. Game (How's the weather?)
1. (Showing some pictures on the big screen.) Ask Ss "How's the weather?"
2. Ss guess and answer the question.
Ⅳ. Listening
1. Now let's look at the city names in the box in 1b. Please read after me.
Ss read the cities after the teacher.
2. Now, We’ll hear four conversations. Listen carefully, point out each city in the picture as it comes upon the tape. Play the recording a second time. Ask Ss to write the name of the city in the picture of its weather.
3. Check the answers.
Ⅴ. Pair work
1. Tell the Ss: If you are in one of the places in the picture above. Talk about the weather
with your friends in another city on the phone.
2. Make a model with a student like this:
T: Hi! How's the weather in Beijing?
S1: It's sunny.
3. Ss work in pairs. Ask and answer about the weather in the cities.
Ⅵ. Listening
1. Work on 2a.
Let's see what Joe's families are doing. Point to the 4 pictures.
2. Ask Ss tell each person is doing in each picture. More attentions should be paid
to the correct use of the Present Progressive Tense.
3. Play the recording for the Ss to listen and number the pictures [1-4].
4. Play the tape for Ss to check the answers.
5. With the whole picture, get some Ss to tell the story of it.
6. Brainstorming
Play the tape for another time. Then do a memory test.
Ask Ss: What's Uncle Joe/Jeff/Mary/Aunt Sarah doing?
What're Scott and Lucy doing?
Is Jeff watching TV? etc.
7. Let Ss match the names with the activities in 2b.
Play the recording for the Ss to check the answers.
Ⅶ. Pair work
1. Look at the pictures and talk about the people in 2a with a partner.
2. Ask a student the questions as a model:
T: What's Uncle Joe doing?
S1: He's playing basketball.
3. Ss work in pairs. Ask and answer about the pictures.
Ⅷ. Role-play
1. Ask Ss to read the conversation and answer the questions:
① What's Steve doing?
② What's Rick's brother doing?
Ss read the conversations and answer the questions. Then check the answers together.
2. Let Ss role-play the conversation in pairs.
IX. Language points.
X. Exercises
Homework:
一、总结有关天气的词汇。
二、编写三个有关天气问答的对话。
音乐教案－七年级教案模板
第一课时：〈〈采茶舞曲〉〉
教学目标：1、能够用圆润而有弹性的声音、轻快活泼的情绪演唱〈〈采茶舞曲〉〉。
2、了解〈〈采茶舞曲〉〉与越剧及浙江民歌之间的关系。
3、结合介绍“采茶舞“，通过律动把学生的情绪调动起来，完全融入歌曲的意境中。
教学重点：歌曲〈〈采茶舞曲〉〉的演唱
教学过程：
一、课件演示：“采茶舞”的舞蹈录象。
使学生通过观看舞蹈了解到这首曲子欢快活泼的情绪特点，并营造出了一个愉快的课堂气氛——引出歌曲〈〈采茶舞曲〉〉
二、学习歌曲〈〈采茶舞曲〉〉
1、介绍〈〈采茶舞曲〉〉的创作背景及作者。
2、课件演示：歌曲〈〈采茶舞曲〉〉的演唱录音。
学生通过再次聆听进一步熟悉歌曲旋律
3、视唱歌谱
4、加入歌词唱
（1）轻声唱一遍全曲，边唱边思考问题：
l根据歌曲的内容及情感要求，应该怎样安排它的力度层次？
l歌曲的高潮在哪里？
（2）学生讨论以上问题，在讨论的基础上试着演唱并选择一两种大家满意的处理意见。
（3）按学生选择的处理方案来演唱歌曲。
（4）模仿用方言来演唱歌曲
讨论：用普通话唱和用方言唱哪一种更能表现出歌曲的风格、特色？
三、律动
我校很多学生家里都种茶叶，都采过或看到过采茶，先让学生来做一做采茶的动作，然后学习“采茶舞“中的采茶动作，使学生了解舞蹈来自于生活，但要经过艺术加工。
学生在〈〈采茶舞曲〉〉的音乐伴奏中做着“采茶“的律动，在欢快热烈的气氛中结束本课。
第二课时：《长江两岸的民歌》
教学目标：1、结合地理知识了解长江两岸各个地区的民歌及其特点。
2、重点感受《龙船调》、《十送红军》的内容及地方风格，并尝试用哑剧的形式表演《龙船调》。
教学重点：《龙船调》、《十送红军》的聆听与感受。
课前的准备：1、布置学生在地图上查找——在长江两岸有哪些省（直辖市）
2、每个小组自选一个地区对其地理位置、环境、有哪些著名民歌以及民歌的风格特点或其他与这个地区有关的知识进行讲解。
教学过程：
一、学生的讲述
每组选派代表把本组选定的主题进行介绍，可以通过语言讲解、播放音像资料、制作课件等多种形式来介绍，本组的其他成员可以进行补充。
教师也可以做补充说明，并帮助学生进行小结。
二、教师在学生讲述的过程中插入对几个重点曲目的介绍：
1、《龙船调》
（1）完整聆听一遍《龙船调》，感受歌曲的风格特点。
问题：这首歌属于民歌中的哪一种？（山歌、小调、号子）
开头带有明显的山歌风味，这种山歌风的曲调造成一种远距离打招呼的感觉。最后一段音乐既有划船时唱劳动号子的形象又有重新唱起山歌的形象，蕴涵着丰富的生活内容。
（2）介绍：《龙船调》原是湖北利川花灯中的一首花灯调……
（3）欣赏宋祖英《龙船调》MTV（注意其中的表演）
（4）创造性表演
以小组为单位，在模仿的基础上进行自由创造。
2、《十送红军》
（1）介绍歌曲背景
（2）聆听歌曲
思考：歌曲中有哪些演唱形式？为什么要有这些演唱形式上的变化？对歌曲情绪的表达有什么作用？
3、简单介绍、聆听其他一些地区的民歌
（1）四川：《太阳出来喜洋洋》
（2）湖南：《浏阳河》等
三、小结
第三课时：《江南丝竹》
教学目标：1、激发学生对民族器乐了解和探究的兴趣。
2、感受、体验江南丝竹的音乐风格。
3、能用口琴较流畅地演奏《茉莉花》，并与打击乐相配合。
教学重点：《茉莉花》的演奏
教学过程：
一、欣赏《欢乐歌》
并介绍“江南丝竹”，以及常见的民族乐器。
二、口琴教学：《茉莉花》
1、聆听磁带演奏
2、学习吹奏《茉莉花》旋律
先学习高声部旋律，视学生情况逐步加入中声部、低声部
三、打击乐创作
1、以小组为单位，进行讨论创编节奏。
2、各小组演示自己的创作成果。
要求与口琴《茉莉花》的演奏相配合，小组成员分工合作。由教师以及学生推选出的“评委”评分，评出“最佳创作奖”、“最佳演奏奖”、“最佳合作奖”。
四、小结
